Transcript
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E RMT-809/811/812
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver 1.0 2000. 05
Level 2
US Model Canadian Model Korea Model DCR-PC5
AEP Model UK Model DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Australian Model Chinese Model DCR-PC5E
Photo : DCR-PC5 (GRAY) RMT-811
E Model Hong Kong Model Tourist Model DCR-PC5/PC5E
J MECHANISM On the VC-245 board This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the VC-245 board. Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts list of the VC-245 board are not shown. The following pages are not shown. Schematic diagram .......................... Pages 4-17 to 4-54 Printed wiring board ......................... Pages 4-55 to 4-58 Electrical parts list ............................ Pages 6-13 to 6-25
For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS, refer to the “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL J MECHANISM ” (9-929-807-11). DCR-PC5 : NTSC model DCR-PC4E/PC5E : PAL model
• Table showing differences is shown on page 3.
SPECIFICATIONS
— Continued on next page —
DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER
• SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES Check that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1.
2. 3.
Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
4.
Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C during repairing. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering.
—2—
Table for differences of function Model Destination
DCR-PC4E AEP, UK
DCR-PC5 US, CND, E, HK, KR, JE
Color system Remote commander
PAL RMT-809
NTSC RMT-811
Digital zoom MEMORY STICK slot
40 × ✕
120 × a
✕
DIGITAL I/O (RS232C) LINE IN EVF (pixel)
DCR-PC5E
DCR-PC5E
AEP, UK PAL
E, AUS, HK, CN, JE PAL
RMT-812 40 ×
RMT-811 120 ×
a
a
a
a
a
✕
a
113 K
180 K
✕ 180 K
a 180 K
Remark
a: with IC1402 to IC1407 of VC-245 board. a: with REC button and IC903 of VC-245 board. Abbreviation CND: Canadian mode HK: Hong Kong model AUS: Austrarian model CN: Chinese model JE: Tourist model KR: Korea model
—3—
TABLE OF CONTENTS SERVICE NOTE 1. 2.
POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ····························· 7 TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT) ································································ 7
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 4.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ······································· 8 SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ·········································· 8 SERVICE MODE DISPLAY ············································· 8 Display Method ·································································· 8 Backup No. ········································································· 8 End of Display ···································································· 8 SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE ··································· 9
1.
GENERAL
Checking supplied accessories ·················································· 1-1 Quick Start Guide ······································································ 1-1 Getting started ··········································································· 1-2 Using this manual ·································································· 1-2 Step 1 Preparing the power supply ········································ 1-2 Charging the battery pack ···················································· 1-2 Installing the battery pack ···················································· 1-3 Connecting to the mains ······················································ 1-4 Step 2 Inserting a cassette ······················································ 1-4 Step 3 Using a touch panel ···················································· 1-4 Recording –Basics ····································································· 1-5 Recording a picture ································································ 1-5 Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) ·························· 1-6 Shooting in the dark (NightShot/Super NightShot) ············· 1-7 Self-timer recording ····························································· 1-7 END SEARCH ···································································· 1-7 Playback –Basics ······································································· 1-8 Playing back a tape ································································ 1-8 Viewing the recording on TV ················································ 1-9 Advanced Recording Operations ············································· 1-10 Recording a still image on a tape –Tape Photo recording ··· 1-10 Adjusting the white balance manually ································· 1-11 Using the wide mode ··························································· 1-11 Using the fader function ······················································ 1-11 Using special effects –Picture effect ···································· 1-12 Using special effects –Digital effect ···································· 1-13 Using the PROGRAM AE function ····································· 1-13 Adjusting the exposure manually ········································ 1-14 Using the spot light-metering mode – Flexible Spot Meter ··· 1-14 Focusing manually ······························································· 1-15 Advanced Playback Operations ··············································· 1-15 Playing back a tape with picture effects ······························ 1-15 Playing back a tape with digital effects ······························· 1-16 Enlarging images recorded on tapes – PB ZOOM ·············· 1-16 Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function ·· 1-16 Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title –Title search ········································································· 1-17 Searching a recording by date –Date search ························ 1-17 Searching for a photo –Photo search/Photo scan ················· 1-18 Editing ····················································································· 1-19 Dubbing a tape ····································································· 1-19 Dubbing only desired scenes –Digital program editing ······ 1-19 Audio dubbing ····································································· 1-22 Superimposing a title ··························································· 1-23 Making your own titles ························································ 1-24 Labeling a cassette ······························································· 1-25 Customizing Your Camcorder ················································· 1-25 Changing the menu settings ················································· 1-25 Resetting the date and time ·················································· 1-27 “Memory Stick” Operations (DCR-PC5/PC5E only) ············· 1-27 Using a “Memory Stick” –introduction ······························· 1-27 Recording still images on “Memory Stick” –Memory photo recording ··················································· 1-29
Superimposing a still picture in the “Memory Stick” on a moving picture –MEMORY MIX ································ 1-30 Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image ·· 1-32 Copying still images from a mini DV tape –Photo save ······ 1-32 Viewing a still picture –Memory photo playback ················ 1-33 Enlarging still images recorded on “Memory Stick”s –Memory PB ZOOM ··························································· 1-34 Playing back images continuously – SLIDE SHOW ··········· 1-34 Preventing accidental erasure –Image protection ················ 1-35 Deleting images ··································································· 1-35 Writing a print mark –PRINT MARK ································· 1-36 Additional Information ···························································· 1-36 Using the viewfinder ···························································· 1-36 Usable cassettes ··································································· 1-36 About i.LINK ······································································· 1-37 Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-38 Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-39 Warning indicators and messages ········································ 1-39 Using your camcorder abroad ·············································· 1-40 Maintenance information and precautions ··························· 1-40 Quick Reference ······································································ 1-42 Identifying the parts and controls ········································ 1-42 Quick Function Guide ························································· 1-44
2.
DISASSEMBLY
2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10.
2-14. 2-15.
LCD UNIT, PD-126 BOARD ········································· 2-2 CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ·························· 2-3 CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ·························· 2-4 BJ-1 BOARD ··································································· 2-4 LENS-EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·································· 2-5 MICROPHONE BLOCK, SPEAKER ···························· 2-5 VC-245 BOARD ····························································· 2-6 MECHANISM DECK ····················································· 2-6 CF-75 BOARD, LENS DEVICE (LSV-651B) ··············· 2-7 HEADPHONE JACK, S TERMINAL, LITHIUM BATTERY, MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR (PC5/PC5E MODEL) ···························· 2-8 NS-12 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-30350), CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) ·· 2-9 LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-11 ATTACHING HARNESSES OF THE LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY ·································································· 2-12 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-13 FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14
3.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. 3-6.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC4E) ······ 3-1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC5/PC5E) · 3-3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-5 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-7 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································ 3-9 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ······························ 3-11
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
2-11. 2-12. 2-13.
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-5 • CF-75 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-7 • NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-11 • CF-75 (CCD IMAGER)(1/2), NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 • CF-75 (PITCH, YAW SENSOR)(2/2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
—4—
Shematic diagram and printed wiring board of the VC-245 board are not shown. Pages from 4-17 to 4-58 are not shown. • PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE) PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····················· 4-60 • PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-60 • FP-100 (MODE SWITCH). FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), FP-102 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL) FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-61 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-63 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-65 • BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-67 • BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-69 • PD-126 (LCD DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-71 • PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)(1/2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-73 • PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)(2/2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-75 4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-77 4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-82
5. 1. 1-1. 5-1. 1-1.
ADJUSTMENTS
Before starting adjustment ··············································· 5-1 Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. ··· 5-2 CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 5-4 PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION) ··················································· 5-4 1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 5-4 1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 5-5 1-1-3. Precaution ········································································ 5-7 1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 5-7 2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-7 3. Subjects ··········································································· 5-7 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA ··· 5-8 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA ·················· 5-8 1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data ···································· 5-8 2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data ·································· 5-8 3. C Page Table ···································································· 5-8 4. D Page Table ·································································· 5-10 5. 8 Page Table ··································································· 5-11 1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF B PAGE DATA (DCR-PC5/PC5E) ························································· 5-12 1. Initializing the B Page Data ··········································· 5-12 2. Modification of B Page Data ········································· 5-12 3. B Page Table ·································································· 5-12 1-2-3. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA ················· 5-13 1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data ··································· 5-13 2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data ································· 5-13 3. F Page Table ·································································· 5-13 4. E Page Table ·································································· 5-14 5. 7 Page Table ··································································· 5-15 1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 5-16 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-245 board) ·· 5-16 1. 2. Zoom Key Center Adjustment ······································· 5-16 3. HALL Adjustment ························································· 5-17 4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 5-18 5. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject More Than 500m Away) ··································· 5-19
5-1. 5-2. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 1-4.
Flange Back Adjustment (1) ·········································· 5-19 Flange Back Adjustment (2) ·········································· 5-19 Flange Back Check ························································ 5-20 Optical Axis Adjustment ··············································· 5-21 Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 5-22 Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-23 MAX GAIN Adjustment ··············································· 5-24 Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input ··········· 5-24 Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 5-25 White Balance Check ···················································· 5-26 Mechanical Shutter Adjustment (DCR-PC5/PC5E) ······ 5-27 Steady Shot Check ························································· 5-27 COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 5-28 1. VCO Adjustment (VC-245 board) ································ 5-28 2. Bright Adjustment (VC-245 board) ······························· 5-29 3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-245 board) ··························· 5-29 4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-245 board) ················· 5-30 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 5-31 1. VCO Adjustment (PD-126 board) ································· 5-31 2. Bright Adjustment (PD-126 board) ······························· 5-32 3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-126 board) ······················ 5-32 4. Contrast Adjustment (PD-126 board) ···························· 5-33 5. Center Level Adjustment (PD-126 board) ····················· 5-33 6. V-COM Adjustment (PD-126 board) ···························· 5-34 7. White Balance Adjustment (PD-126 board) ·················· 5-34 5-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT ·················· 5-35 2-1. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT CASSETTE ··································································· 5-35 2-2. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT CASSETTE ··································································· 5-35 2-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT ········································ 5-35 1. Preparation for Adjustment ··········································· 5-35 2. Procedure after operations ············································· 5-35 5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ··························· 5-36 3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ············ 5-36 3-1-1. Equipment Required ······················································ 5-36 3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting ··············································· 5-37 3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors ···················································· 5-38 3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment ············································ 5-38 3-1-5. Alignment Tapes ···························································· 5-39 3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance ······························· 5-39 3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 5-40 1. Initialization of B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data ··············· 5-40 2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-40 2-1. Company ID Input ························································· 5-40 2-2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-40 3. Touch Panel Adjustment (VC-245 board) ····················· 5-42 4. Battery End Check (VC-245 board) ······························ 5-42 3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··············· 5-43 1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ··················· 5-43 2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·············· 5-43 3. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·········· 5-44 4. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment ········· 5-44 4-1. Preparations before adjustments ···································· 5-44 4-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·········· 5-44 4-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ··················· 5-45 4-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments ···················· 5-45 3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-46 3-4-1. Base Band Block Adjustments ······································ 5-46 1. Chroma BPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ················ 5-46 2. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·· 5-46 3. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ····························································· 5-47 VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-245 Board) ·· 5-47 4. 3-4-2. BIST Check ·································································· 5-48 1. Playback System Check ················································ 5-48
—5—
1-1. 1-2. 1-3. 1-4. 1-5. 1-6. 2. 2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 3-5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 5-4. 4-1. 1. 2. 4-2. 4-3. 1. 2. 2-1. 2-2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Preparations for Playback ·············································· 5-48 IC301 TRX (RF) PB BIST Check ································· 5-48 IC301 AUD (ABUS) PB BIST Check ··························· 5-48 IC301 VFD PB BIST Check ········································· 5-48 IC301 ENCODER BIST Check ···································· 5-50 Processing after Completing Playback System Check ·· 5-51 Recording System Check ·············································· 5-52 Preparations for recording ············································· 5-52 IC301 TRX (RF) REC BIST Check ····························· 5-52 Processing after Completing Recording System Check ·· 5-52 AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ···························· 5-53 Playback Level Check ··················································· 5-54 Overall Level Characteristics Check ····························· 5-54 Overall Distortion Check ··············································· 5-54 Overall Noise Level Check ············································ 5-54 Overall Separation Check ·············································· 5-54 SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-55 ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-55 Using the adjustment remote commander ····················· 5-55 Precautions upon using the adjustment remote commander ···································································· 5-55 DATA PROCESS ··························································· 5-56 SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-57 Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 5-57 Emergence Memory Address ········································ 5-57 EMG Code (Emergency Code) ····································· 5-57 MSW Code ···································································· 5-58 Bit value discrimination ················································ 5-59 Switch check (1) ···························································· 5-59 Switch check (2) ···························································· 5-60 Record of Use check ······················································ 5-60 Record of Self-diagnosis check ····································· 5-61
6.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1 6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 6-1 6-1-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ·························· 6-2 6-1-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ·························· 6-3 6-1-4. LENS-EVF SECTION ···················································· 6-4 6-1-5. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 6-5 6-1-6. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT AND DRUM BLOCK ASSEMBLY ···································································· 6-6 6-1-7. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ······························· 6-7 6-1-8. MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ··········· 6-8 6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 6-9 Parts list of the VC-245 board are not shown. Pages from 6-13 to 6-25 are not shown. * Optical axis frame and color reproduction frame are shown on page 198 to 199.
—6—
SERVICE NOTE 1.
POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS
In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated power supply (4.2V), the power is shut off so that the unit cannot operate. This following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs. Method 1. Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the commander switch to the "ADJ" side. Method 2. Use the AC power adaptor (AC-VF10 or AC-VQ11) and connecting cord (DK-115).
2. 1 2 3 4 5 6
TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT) Refer to 2-2 to remove the accessory shoe. Refer to 2-2, 2-3 to remove the cabinet (R) assembly. Refer to 2-5 to remove the lens-EVF block assembly. Refer to 2-7 to remove VC-245 board. Refer to 2-8 to remove the mechanism deck. Supply +4.5V from the DC power supply to the loading motor and unload with a pressing the cassette compartment.
DC power supply (+4.5Vdc)
: Unloading : Loading
Loading motor
—7—
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 1.
2.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the viewfinder or LCD screen consists of an alphabet and 4-digit numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This 5-character display indicates the “repaired by:”, “block” in which the problem occurred, and “detailed code” of the problem.
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder or LCD screen what to do. This function consists of two display; selfdiagnosis display and service mode display. Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction manual. Viewfinder or LCD screen C:31:11
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C
11 Detailed Code
Block
Repaired by:
C : Corrected by customer H : Corrected by dealer E : Corrected by service engineer
3.
31
Refer to page 9. Indicates the appropriate Self-diagnosis Code Table. step to be taken. E.g. 31 ....Reload the tape. 32 ....Turn on power again.
SERVICE MODE DISPLAY
The service mode display shows the last self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.
3-1.
Display Method
While pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key, set the switch from OFF to “VCR or PLAYER”, and continue pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key for 5 seconds continuously. The service mode will be displayed, and the counter will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis codes. Viewfinder or LCD screen [3] C : 3 1 : 1 1
Lights up
[3] Backup No.
C:31:11 Self-diagnosis Codes
Order of previous errors
3-2.
Backup No.
The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in which the problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the number of problems which occurred will be shown.) [1] : Occurred first time [4] : Occurred fourth time [2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time [3] : Occurred third time [6] : Occurred the last time Note: Switching of the backup No. can’t be done.
3-3.
End of Display
Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display. Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the coin-type lithium battery of control switch block (FK-30350) BT4001. When this cointype lithium battery is removed, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.
—8—
4.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE
Repaired by:
Self-diagnosis Code Block Detailed Function Code
Symptom/State
Correction
C C C
0 2 2
4 1 2
0 0 0
0 0 0
C
3
1
1
0
C
3
1
1
1
C
3
1
2
0
C
3
1
2
1
C C C C C C
3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 3 4 4
2 3 4 0 0 2
C
3
1
1
0
C
3
1
1
1
C
3
2
2
0
C
3
2
2
1
Non-standard battery is used. Condensation. Video head is dirty. LOAD direction. Loading does not complete within specified time UNLOAD direction. Loading does not complete within specified time T reel side tape slacking when unloading. Winding S reel fault when counting the rest of tape. T reel fault. S reel fault. T reel fault. FG fault when starting capstan. FG fault when starting drum. FG fault during normal drum operations. LOAD direction loading motor timeout. UNLOAD direction loading motor time-out. T reel side tape slacking when unloading. Winding S reel fault when counting the rest of tape.
C
3
2
2
2
T reel fault.
C
3
2
2
3
S reel fault.
C
3
2
2
4
T reel fault.
C
3
2
3
0
FG fault when starting capstan.
C
3
2
4
0
FG fault when starting drum
C
3
2
4
2
FG fault during normal drum operations
E
6
1
0
0
Difficult to adjust focus (Cannot initialize focus.)
E
6
1
1
0
Zoom operations fault (Cannot initialize zoom lens.)
E
6
2
0
0
E
6
2
0
1
Steadyshot function does not work well. (With pitch angular velocity sensor output stopped.) Steadyshot function does not work well. (With yaw angular velocity sensor output stopped.)
Use the info LITHIUM battery. Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour. Clean with the optional cleaning cassette. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning. Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin 7 of CF-75 board) when focusing is performed when the control dial is rotated in the focus manual mode, and the focus motor drive circuit (IC204 of VC-245 board) when the focusing is not performed. Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin w; of CF-75 board) when zooming is performed when the zoom lens is operated and the zoom motor drive circuit (IC204 of VC-245 board) when zooming is not performed. Inspect pitch angular velocity sensor (SE3450 of CF-75 board) peripheral circuits. Inspect yaw angular velocity sensor (SE3451 of CF-75 board) peripheral circuits.
—9—
SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
2-1. LCD unit, PD-126 board
PD-126 board service position
2-2. Cabinet (R) block assembly-1
Service position (Mainly for adjustment)
2-3. Cabinet (R) block assembly-2
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
2-4. BJ-1 board
2-5. Lens-EVF block assembly
2-9. CF-75 board, Lens device (LSV-651B)
2-6. Microphone block, Speaker
2-7. VC-245 board
2-8. Mechanism deck
2-10. Headphone jack , S terminal, Lithium battery, Memory stick connector (PC5/PC5E model) 2-11. NS-12 board, Control switch block (PS-30350), Control switch block (FK-30350)
2-12. LCD hinge assembly
2-13. Attaching harnesses of the LCD hinge assembly
2-1
Service position (Mainly for voltage measurement and check)
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. LCD UNIT, PD-126 BOARD REMOVING THE PD-126 BOARD, INVERTER TRANSFORMER UNIT 4 Back light Cold cathode fluorescent tube 8 Inverter transformer unit
2 LCD unit (24P) 1 Touch panel (TP-30350)(7P)
5 PCB clip
2 LCD cabinet (R) assembly
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 0 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
A
3 Remove the three solderings 7 Remove the six solderings
B
9 PD-126 board 6 -12 PD oard B
6 -12 PD oard B
qd PD-126 board, Inverter transformer unit 4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
6 PCB clip
qs Back light Cold cathode fluorescent tube, BL shield sheet (N)
qa Two claws
7 Panel spacer 9 LCD unit 8 Touch panel (TP-30350)
5 Panel protection sheet
3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
A
B 6 LCD cabinet (T) assembly
[PD-126 BOARD SERVICE POSITION] Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
LANC jack
Touch panel (TP-30350)
6 -12 PD oard B
LCD unit
PD-126 board, Inverter transformer unit Back light Cold cathode fluorescent tube, BL shield sheet (N)
2-2
AC POWER ADAPTOR (4.2Vdc) (AC-VF10) (AC-VQ11)
AC IN
2-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 1 Two screws (+K M2 × 5) 2 Accessory shoe 3 MIC cover
4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), 8 Cabinet (R) block assembly When removing it, be careful not lock ace, p2 to damage the harnesses, etc. 5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 45 -2 VCard Bo
A B
7 Push the eject knob in the direction of the arrow, and open the cassette lid.
A B
6 Screw (M1.7 × 4), lock ace, p2
[SERVICE POSITION (Mainly for adjustment)] Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
AC IN
AC POWER ADAPTOR (4.2Vdc) (AC-VF10) (AC-VQ11)
CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A) CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B)
2-3
2-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
2 Harness (PR-062) (8P)
4 Cabinet (R) block assembly
1 Harness (PD-109) (14P)
45 -2 VCard Bo A B
A B
3 BJ-1 board (60P)
2-4. BJ-1 BOARD REMOVING THE BJ-1 BOARD
1 Remove the three solderings
2 Battery holder, Battery terminal board 3 BJ-1 board
3 BT cushion
9 Battery holder, Battery terminal board
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 1 Open the Jack cover in the direction of the arrow.
8 BJ-1 board 2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
7 Harness (PR-062) (2P)
2-4
2-5. LENS-EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY PRECAUTION DURING INSTALLATION B A B
When installing, align the groove A of the lens-EVF block assembly and the portion B of the cabinet (L) assembly as shown.
3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
4 Lens-EVF block assembly
2 NS-12 board (8P) 5
4 -2 VCard Bo
1 CF-75 board (88P)
2-6. MICROPHONE BLOCK, SPEAKER
3 Microphone block
2 Speaker retainer assembly
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
45 -2 VCard Bo
2
1 Remove the two solderings 3 Speaker
REMOVING THE SPEAKER
2-5
2-7. VC-245 BOARD REMOVING THE VC-245 BOARD VC-245 board
Two claws
2 Remove the VC-245 board in the direction of the arrow.
8 VC-245 board
4 Flexible board (from capstan motor) (27P) 5 FP-102 flexible board (27P) 6 Flexible board (from video head) (10P) 7 Flexible board (from drum motor) (10P) 3 Control switch block (FK-30350) (39P)
45 -2 VCard Bo
45 -2 VCard Bo
1 Three screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
2-8. MECHANISM DECK 3 Open the cabinet (G) assembly, MD frame assembly in the direction of the arrow A.
REMOVING THE CASSETTE COMPARTMENT COVER 1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 3 Mechanism deck 2 Two screws (M1.4 × 1.5)
B A 2 Cassette compartment cover
1 Two screws (M1.4 × 1.5)
4 Two dowels 5 Remove the mechanism deck, Cassette compartment cover in the direction of the arrow B. (Be careful not to damage the mechanism deck´s flexible.)
2-6
2-9. CF-75 BOARD, LENS DEVICE (LSV-651B) Note: Be careful that dust must not enter during re-assembly.
REMOVING THE VF LENS ASSEMBLY 3 VF lens assembly 2 Screw (M1.7 × 3), lock ace, p2
3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
1 4 VF regulation ring assembly
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 5 VF sleeve
1 Screw (M1.7 × 3), lock ace, p2
4 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4), p2
2 BL cushion (B), BL unit, BL cushion (L), Light guide plate block, CF-75 Board
4 LCD cushion
5 VF sleeve guide assembly 3 LCD (LCX032AK-J) (PC4E) (16P) LCD (LCX033AK-J) (PC5/PC5E) (16P)
1 Two claws
2 claw 6 BL cushion (L)
5 BL cushion (B) 1 Two claws
7 BL unit
8 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
A 3 Light guide plate block Remove by sliding in the direction of the arrow A.
1 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 5), p2
4 Light guide plate block (6P) 9 CF-75 Board 7 Seal rubber (W)
2 CD frame 6 CF-75 Board
8 Optical filter block (OFB-04-14) qd Lens device (LSV-651B)
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 4 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4), p2
qs Zoom motor 0 Forcus motor
3 CF insulating sheet
9 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4), p2 qa Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4), p2
2-7
2-10.HEADPHONE JACK, S TERMINAL, LITHIUM BATTERY, MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR (PC5/PC5E MODEL) 3 Special head screw (M2.6), (step)
6 Cabinet (G) assembly
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4), p2 2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 4 Two dowels 5
1 Close the cabinet (G) assembly and MD frame assembly in the direction 4 Belt bracket (front) of the arrow. assembly, Grip belt
3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
qg Cabinet (G) assembly 6 HP jack retainer 7 Remove the two solderings 1 8 Lithium battery 0 Headphone jack 9 Remove the four solderings qa Remove the eight solderings 4 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4), p2
qs S terminal
5 Control switch block (FK-30350) qd Remove the eleven solderings qf Memory stick connector (PC5/PC5E model)
2-8
2 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4), p2 3 MS connector retainer
2-11. NS-12 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-30350), CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350)
9 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4), p2
3 Screw (M1.7 × 2), lock ace, p2
2 Dowel 1 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
0 Control switch block (PS-30350)
PRECAUTION DURING INSTALLATION Position the claw of the MD frame assembly on its top as shown.
8 MD frame assembly
4 Dowel 7 NS-12 board (8P) 6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 5 NS window assembly
5 G Frame ground plate 3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
2 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
6 Cabinet (L) assembly
4 Control switch block (FK-30350)
2-9
[SERVICE POSITION (Mainly for voltage measurement and check)] CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A)
Lens device (LSV-651B)
CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) NS-12 board (8P)
Cabinet (R) block assembly
CF-75 board (88P)
Harness (PD-109) (14P) Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Control switch block (FK-30350) (39P)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95) Control switch block (PS-30350)
45 -2 rd VC oa B
Mechanism deck
BJ-1 board (60P) AC POWER ADAPTOR (4.2Vdc) (AC-VF10) (AC-VQ11) VC-245 board
AC IN
Flexible board (from capstan motor) (27P) FP-102 flexible board (27P) Flexible board (from video head) (10P) Flexible board (from drum motor) (10P) Control switch block (FK-30350) (39P) VC -2 Bo 45 ard
2-10
2-12.LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY 4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 When fastening 4, fasten it while pushing the 5 in the direction of the arrow A. 1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 When fastening 1, fasten it while pushing 5 Blind plate assembly, the qs in the direction of the arrow B. PO-5 board 8 Hinge cover (rear)
Hinge cover (front)
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
qs LCD hinge assembly A
3 MF spacer
2 B
Two claws
Hinge cover (rear)
7 Remove the hinge cover (rear) in the direction of the arrow.
9 Claw
qa Sheet (S) 0 Hinge cover (front) Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Harness (PD-109) (14P)
PRECAUTION DURING INSTALLATION 6 -12 PD oard B
Align sheet (S) with top edge of LCD cabinet (T) assembly
Wrap the harness with sheet (S) for protection.
REMOVING THE HARNESS (PD-109) (14P) 1 Remove the harness (PD-109)(14P) in the direction of the arrow.
REMOVING THE PO-5 BOARD Two claws
REMOVING THE HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P) 2 Route the harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P) through the hole of the LCD hinge assembly
5 Remove PO-5 board in the direction of the arrow.
Then bend the harness so that it is laid along with the connector.
6 Blind plate assembly
Then bend the harness so that it is laid along with the connector.
REMOVING THE PR-35 BOARD
3 Remove the two solderings
Harness (Two cores) (PR-062) (8P) (2P) (8P)
7 Remove PR-35 board in the direction of the arrow.
(14P) 4 Remove the two solderings
(2P) (8P)
Harness (PD-109) (14P) (14P)
2-11
8 LCD hinge assembly
2-13.ATTACHING HARNESSES OF THE LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY 1
2
Blind plate assembly
PR-35 board
Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
LCD hinge assembly
PO-5 board
Hinge cover (rear)
Harness (PD-109) (14P)
(8P)
(14P)
Hinge cover (front) Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
Harness (PD-109) (14P)
Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Bend one of the two harnesses at its connector.
3
4 A B
PO-5 board
C D
5
A KEY-A03
6
B Gnd
7
C KEY-A02
8
D Gnd
Solder at the two positions.
D C B
CN006 A
Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
5 Install the PO-5 board in
6
LCD hinge assembly
the direction of the arrow.
PR-35 board Solder at the two positions.
Route the harnesses (PR-062) (8P) (2P) and (PD-109) (14P) through the hole of the LCD hinge assembly as shown.
Two claws
LCD hinge assembly Blind plate assembly
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 4 Hinge cover (rear)
Attach the PR-35 board to the LCD hinge assembly with the both-sided adhesive tape.
7
LCD hinge assembly
8 Hinge cover (rear)
3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2 1 Close Blind plate in the direction of the arrow.
Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P), Harness (PD-109) (14P) Blind plate assembly 2 Two claws
Claw 1 Hinge cover (front)
Hinge cover (front) LCD hinge assembly 2 When attaching the blind plate assembly, route the harnesses through the notch as shown while taking care so that the harness must not be caught or pinched.
3 Close hinge cover (rear) in the direction of the arrow.
2-12
2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION The circuit boards contained in the zoom lens are not shown.
CF-75 (CCD IMAGER)
PD-126 (LCD DRIVER) PO-5 (PANEL OPEN) PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE) INVERTER TRANSFORMER UNIT
NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
VC-245 A/D CONVERTER, LENS DRIVER, CAMERA SIGNAL PROCESSING, DV SIGNAL PROCESSING, DV INTERFACE, REC/PB AMP, PS CONTROL, JPEG, MS INTERFACE, LINE IN/OUT, EVF/RGB, DRUM CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, MECHA CONTROL, HI CONTROL, AUDIO IN/OUT, DC/DC CONVERTER
BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY)
2-13
2-15.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck and that in the zoom lens are not shown.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) (PC5/PC5E)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-30350)
TOUCH PANEL (TP-30350)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) (PC4E)
2-14E
J3102
LANC/ DIGITAL I/O
YAW SENSOR
SE3451
16
8
12
LANC GND/232C TD
LANC SIG/232C RD
YAW/PITCH SENSOR AMP
IC3451
(4-15)
MANUAL FOCUS SENSOR
NIGHT SHOT
ZOOM RESET SENSOR
M
M
FOCUS RESET SENSOR
H
M
BJ-1 BOARD(1/3)
PITCH SENSOR
SE3450
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
IRIS METER
IRIS (SHUTTER)
LENS ASSY
32 32
15
11 11
12 12
28 28
27 27
31 31
17
56 56
CN003
60 60
7
5
17 19
57 57
5
CN3103
4
2
21 23
47 47
5
7
17
19
V1-V4,VSHT H1,H2,RG
V DRAIN
CN001
6
8
50 50
46 46
40 40
42 42
35 35
36 36
53 53
18
2
ZM A,B ZM XA,XB
FC A,B FC XA,XB
HALL +,-
DRIVE +,-
20
1
4
14
11
9
25
23
27
26
CN3351 CN3354
1-4 • 10-13
CCD IMAGER
IC3201
(4-13)
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
IRIS DRIVE
MF A,B
9
16
13
12
15
13
47
42
30
HD VD
14
22
59
58
41
40
23
(4-21)
IC802
(4-21)
ZM RST
FC RST
3-1
ZOOM AD
AD SO,AD SCK
CAM SO,SI,SCK
I HALL AD
IRIS PWM
LANC SIG
PANEL R,G,B,EVF R,G,B,HD,VD
OSD CS,SO,SCK
ZOOM AD
HI SO,SI,SCK
50
|
48
62
54
53
35
34
33
66
43
ENI,DIR 1A,DIR 1B
CAMERA CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
2
3
4
ENO,DIR OA,DIR OB
SHUTTER ON
EEPROM
IC801
I HALL AD
138
137
144
143
142
141
140
139
133
50
(4-28) 1 OSD CS OSD SO OSD SCK
3
CHARACTER GENERATOR
IC302 18 • 17 • 16 • 14
COL0 195 • | COL3 194 • 191 • 190
184 • 183
48
52
20 • 19
DV SIGNAL PROCESS
(CAIN)
IC301 51 141
59
55
63
65
67
105 • 106
71
73
75
161
159
179
170
79
81
88
83
97
99
127
132
133
156
153
8
3 7
145
142
23
17
215
(4-37)
72
5
1
213
201
211
205
152
SPCK
C0-C3
199 203 207
21
HD,VD,OE HD,VD OE
C0-C3
Y0-Y7
71
70
56
|
59
61
Y0-Y7
SPCK(IC751)
111
110
46
115
112
(BIRDS+) CAMERA PROCESS, FOCUS/ZOOM CONTROL, EVR
|
68
38
HD,VD
CL
MSUB
CLP OB
(4-23)
IC751
196
AD CLK
48
|
131
121
AFCK(IC903)
16
AD SO AD SCK
AD0-AD9
37
IRIS PWM
23
|
2
11
35
45
44
12
16
15
2
1
19
(GCAM3) S/H,AGC A/D CONV.
IC701
4
(4-17)
TIMING GENERATOR
IC702
30
CLPDM,PBLK XSHP,XSHD
CCD OUT
5
33
25
22
21
18
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)
PITCH AD
YAW AD
X801 20MHz
(4-20)
IC204
ZOOM MOTOR DRIVE
FOCUS MOTOR DRIVE
SHUTTER DRIVE
IC201
(4-19)
(4-19)
IRIS HALL AMP
CN001
X701 36MHz
78 78
72 72
69 69
81 81
85 85
IC202 IC203
CN3354
139
138
EVF B
EVF R
EVF G
HD,VD
PANEL B
PANEL R
PANEL G
6
C
Y
SFD BCK
DATA FROM SFD
DATA TO SFD
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
LCK
TRCK
L BUS
X301 24.576MHz
79
47
42
45
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
(4-17)
VC-245 BOARD(1/3)
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC4E)
SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS
(4-27)
SFD BCK
DATA TO SFD
DATA FROM SFD
34
36
7
46
10 • 11
37
29
9
6
9 8 12
14 22
D/A CONV. A/D CONV.
(ADC&DAC)
IC1002
(4-48)
VSP SO,SCK
LINE OUT AGC ACC
(TAKO)
18
(4-25)
MC BUS
TPA+,TPB+,-
IC1301
DV INTERFACE
(LIP)
IC361
V
C
Y
15
2
3
16
L R
R
L
15
23
25
17
19
14
AUDIO I/O
(XYZ)
32
42
6
35
2
1
13
14
31
35
19 19
15 15
20 20
24 24
MIC R
EXT MIC R
3
6
23 23
4
3-2
SP+,-
R
L
R
L
CN002
CN003
39
10
8
2
64
55
54
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)
6
3
MIC L
EXT MIC L
IC1001
(4-47)
VSP SO,SI,SCK
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
MC BUS
ATF ERR
PB CK
6
AD DT
REC DT
REC CK
CN003
R
V
L
L R
J3102 DV IN/OUT
R L
(SEE PAGE 4-65)
6
4
2
1
Y
G
(4-65)
CN4003
G
C
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) (1/2)
C
Y
BJ-1 BOARD (2/3)
CN3103
CN3103
J3103
MIC R
MIC L
SPEAKER
HEADPHONE
J4002
S VIDEO
J4001
AUDIO/VIDEO OUT
MIC
J3101
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
LANC/ DIGITAL I/O
J3102
YAW SENSOR
SE3451
16
8
12
LANC GND/232C TD
LANC SIG/232C RD
YAW/PITCH SENSOR AMP
IC3451
(4-15)
MANUAL FOCUS SENSOR
NIGHT SHOT
ZOOM RESET SENSOR
M
M
FOCUS RESET SENSOR
H
M
BJ-1 BOARD(1/3)
PITCH SENSOR
SE3450
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
IRIS METER
IRIS (SHUTTER)
LENS-EVF BLOCK
CN3103
32 32
15
11 11
12 12
28 28
27 27
31 31
17
56 56
CN003
60 60
5
5
17 19
57 57
7
21 23
47 47
4
2
5
7
17
19
V1-V4,VSHT H1,H2,RG
V DRAIN
CN001
6
8
50 50
46 46
53 53
18
2
ZM A,B ZM XA,XB
FC A,B FC XA,XB
40 40
20
1
4
14
11
9
25
42 42
HALL +,-
23
36 36
35 35
DRIVE +,-
27
26
CN3351 CN3354
1-4 • 10-13
CCD IMAGER
IC3201
(4-13)
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
MF A,B
9
16
13
12
15
13
TIMING GENERATOR
IC702
59
58
41
40
23
22
14
IC802
(4-21)
ZM RST
FC RST
3-3
ZOOM AD
AD SO,AD SCK
|
2
48
47
11
232C ON
AD CLK
Q1111
PANEL R,G,B,EVF R,G,B,HD,VD
LANC SIG
16
CAM SO,SI,SCK
I HALL AD
IRIS PWM
I HALL AD
IRIS PWM
23
(GCAM3) S/H,AGC A/D CONV.
IC701
19
OSD CS,SO,SCK
ZOOM AD
HI SO,SI,SCK
50
|
48
62
54
53
35
34
33
66
43
ENI,DIR 1A,DIR 1B
CAMERA CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
2
3
4
ENO,DIR OA,DIR OB
SHUTTER ON
EEPROM
IC801
(4-21)
37
38
35
45
44
12
16
15
2
1
5
(4-17)
30
CLPDM,PBLK XSHP,XSHD
CCD OUT
4
33
25
22
21
18
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)
PITCH AD
YAW AD
X801 20MHz
(4-20)
IC204
ZOOM MOTOR DRIVE
FOCUS MOTOR DRIVE
SHUTTER DRIVE
IC201
(4-19)
(4-19)
IRIS HALL AMP
IRIS DRIVE
CN001
X701 36MHz
78 78
72 72
69 69
81 81
85 85
IC202 IC203
CN3354
(4-17)
VC-245 BOARD(1/3)
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC5/PC5E)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
17
16
AD SO AD SCK
|
131
74
RS232C I/F
IC1403
18
A0-A11
138
137
144
143
142
141
140
139
133
50
52
111
110
46
115
112
121
(4-31)
HD,VD
CL
MSUB
CLP OB
AD0-AD9
(4-23)
15 13
1
13 •
103
TXD
RXD
(4-24)
16Mbit SDRAM
IC752
31
85
(BIRDS+) CAMERA PROCESS, FOCUS/ZOOM CONTROL, EVR
IC751
38
94
48
D1-D10
42
SPCK
96
(SHIORI) DIGITAL STILL PROCESS
10
HI SO,SI SCK
80
72
60
112
113
115
15
43
44
45
46
|
49
51
8 20 • 19
208
19
1
AFCK (IC1903)
(4-28)
18 • 17 • 16 • 14
37
32 49
D0-D15
A1-A19
39
2
16Mbit SDRAM 1 16
25
8 29
4Mbit FLASH
(4-33)
(4-35)
IC1407
63-66
(4-33)
36
A/D CONV.
IC903
VSP SO,SCK
DV SIGNAL PROCESS
(CAIN)
IC301
(4-37)
IC1405 12
EXCEPT AEP/UK MODEL
38
47
|
49
52
|
59
34
31 • 68
COL0 195 • | COL3 194 • 191 • 190
HD,VD,OE
C0-C7
Y0-Y7
AFCK
SPCK (IC751)
OSD CS OSD SO OSD SCK
3
CHARACTER GENERATOR
IC302
184 • 183
48
24
SPCK(IC751)
HD VD
18 22
8
4
216
212
196
6
2
214
206
202
AFCK(IC903)
HD,VD,OE
C0-C3
200 204
7
3
215
17 21
5
1
213
201
211
205
23
|
58 Y0-Y7
199
207
203
26
HD,VD OE
C0-C3
Y0-Y7
27
28
29
|
32
34
14
2
|
9
17
41 |
12
30
(4-34)
IC1406
|
24
13
C0-C7
Y0-Y7
72
HD,VD,OE
C0-C3
Y0-Y7
71
70
56
|
59
61
|
68
45
6
2
59
55
63
65
67
105 • 106
71
73
75
161
159
179
170
79
81
88
83
97
99
127
132
133
156
153
152
141
51
145
142
139
138
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
RXD TXD
35
175
181
34
36
161
160
SFD BCK
192
37
29
9
6
12
8
9
14
42
48
39
22
MS DIO,MS SCLK,MS BS
KASYA ON
D/A CONV. A/D CONV.
(ADC&DAC)
IC1002
(4-48)
VSP SO,SCK
LINE OUT LINE IN AGC ACC
(TAKO)
18
(4-25)
MC BUS
TPA+,TPB+,-
IC1301
10 • 11
X1401 25.8048MHz
DATA FROM SFD
C
Y
7
46
DATA TO SFD
193
|
(LIP) DV INTERFACE
194
53
(4-27)
IC361
|
(KATHMANDU) DIGITAL STILL CONTROL
IC1404
(4-32)
171 • 172 • 178
C
Y
79
47
42
45
79
57
EVF B
EVF R
EVF G
HD,VD
PANEL B
PANEL R
PANEL G
6
SFD BCK
DATA FROM SFD
DATA TO SFD
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
LCK
TRCK
L BUS
X301 24.576MHz
V
C
Y
L R
R
L
3-4
2
3
16
15
4
23
25
17
19
14
15
AUDIO I/O
(XYZ)
54
L
L R
23
21
20
6
32
42
35
2
1
13
14
31
35
19 19
15 15
20 20
24 24
MIC R
EXT MIC R
3
6
23 23
4
SP+,-
R
L
R
CN002
CN003
39
10
8
2
64
53
51
55
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
6
3
MIC L
EXT MIC L
IC1001
(4-47)
VSP SO,SI,SCK
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
MC BUS
ATF ERR
PB CK
6
AD DT
REC DT
REC CK
CN003
R
V
L
L R
J3102
L
R
(SEE PAGE 4-65)
G
CN4001
6
4
2
1
Y
(4-65)
CN4003
G
C
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) (1/2)
C
Y
3
7
9
DV IN/OUT
BJ-1 BOARD (2/3)
CN3103
CN3103
J3103
MIC R
MIC L
SPEAKER
HEADPHONE
J4002
S VIDEO
J4001
EXCEPT: AEP,UK AEP,UK
MEMORY STICK
AUDIO/VIDEO OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO IN/OUT
MIC
J3101
16
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)
(SEE PAGE 3-2,3-4)
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)
(4-44)
FRRV TRRT TRRV
95
(4-43)
60 SWP
DRP SO,XDRP SCK
18
15
34
(4-29)
SWP
42
XCC DOWN
2-4
EEPROM
IC502
CHIME SDA,CHIME SCK,CHIME VDD
HI SO,SI,SCK
VSP SO,SI,SCK
FRRV TRRT,TRRV
MC BUS
ATF ERR
X501 20MHz
46
45
81
| 41
39
44
55
96
53
54
113
114
50
49
117
116
63
82
47
68
69
22
48
3-5
MECHA CONTROL
115
80
83
2
1
76
|
74
108
|
106
37
|
26
IC501
|
78
CAP FG CAP ON,CAP FWD
56
53
(4-41)
58
(RABI) DRUM MOTOR DRIVE
IC401
MODE SW A - MODE SW C
REC PROOF SW
TAPE LED ON
DEW DET
TAPE TOP DETECT
36
35
37
28,30
61
64
20,21,24
TAPE TOP
(1/2)
45,46
TAPE END DETECT
REEL FG AMP
LOADING MOTOR DRIVE
DRUM PG AMP
DRUM FG AMP
(4-41)
(4-42)
21,23,19
14,15
34
26,25
59
1
16,6,3
11
DRUM VS
18.22
(SALVIA) CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE
IC402
CAPSTAN FG AMP
2
3
6
5
TAPE END
SWITCHING
Q1609
SWITCHING
CAP VS
Q1638-1641
2,3
32
EVEN
42,43
UNREG 2
(2/2)
61
Q1614
31
CN101 ODD
48
PWM DRIVE
IC1601
(4-49)
22 24
1
2
7
6
40
22
DRUM ERROR
CAP ERROR
(TRF) EQ A/D CONV. PLL
REC/PB AMP
(TRW)
IC102
SREEL FG
52
54
13
20
IC101
27
42
40
(4-30)
TREEL FG
LOAD,UNLOAD
DRUM PG
DRUM FG
LPF
LPF
(RABI)
(2/2)
IC401
DRUM ON,DRUM FWD,DRUM START
DRUM PWM
CAP PWM
FFREW UP
PB CK
6
6
PB CK
AD DT
AD DT
PB Y OUT
REC DT
RF MON
20
REC CK
17
REC DT
SWP
CN004 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
REC CK
VC-245 BOARD(2/3)
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)
XCC DOWN
CN008
CN010
CN009
M902
19
|
21
17
12
|
10
13
16
1
M903 LOADING MOTOR
3-6
S902
SWITCH
MODE
C IN
4PIN CONNECTOR
REC PROOF
D901 TAPE LED
(4-42)
S903
CN901
S901
Q901 TAPE TOP SENSOR
TAPE END SENSOR
Q902
S REEL SENSOR
4 5
T REEL SENSOR
DEW SENSOR
M
DRUM PG
7
3
DRUM MOTOR
CAPSTAN MOTOR
DRUM FG
M
M901
M
FG
CAPSTAN
8
23
24
|
27
10
9
| 6
1
| 14
11
| 4
1
17 | 20
25
DRUM
J MECHA DECK
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
BATTERY TERMINAL
S
16
BJ-1 BOARD (3/3)
6
33
5
KEY AD1R
RV4001
CAM DD ON
AU 2.8V
D 1.5V
3-7
A 4.6V
RP 4.6V
LCD 2.8V
LCD 4.6V
LCD 13.5V
PANEL 15.5V
MT 4.8V
CAM 12V
D 2.8V
(4-39)
LANC IN
XPHOTO STBY SW
XS/S SW
XEJECT SW
5
16
17
XVTR MODE SW
43
IR ON
45 46
44
OSD SO XOSD SCK
XCS OSD
4
59
SIRCS SIG
36
SIRCS ENV
28
29
49
48
2
1
35
34
SIRCS CARRIER
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
IB SI
3
1
IB SO
LANC OUT
53 XCAM STBY SW
VDD
XHI SCK
HI SI
33
HI SO
52
41
40
87
77
51
42
XRESET
18
73
XCC DOWN
6 71
CHIME SCL
CHIME AD2
5
CHIME AD0
CHIME SDA
95
KEY AD2
(4-45)
BATT SIG
LANC I/O
IC1103
HI SO,SI,SCK
LED DRIVE
Q1102,1105, 1115-1119
I/F
Q1104
12
10 11
CN005
CN001 3
3
CN2100 HD OUT
46
47
48
2
RGB DRIVE
IC2101
(4-73)
PD-126 BOARD
TOUCH PANEL
PWM
24
22
20
LANC SIG
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
VD
HD
KEY AD1R
HI SO,SCK
EVF R,G,B
48
1
42
45
46
39
40
46
47
48
NS LED K
SIRCS SIG
LANC SIG
ZOOM AD
HI,SO,SI,SCK
12
13
10
(4-39)
2
LCD 4.6V
8
14
24
(SEE PAGE 3-1,3-3)
EVF VG
CN001
EVF VCO
8
5
1
4
2
3
2
13
10
22
63
63
68 68
CN3353
2
LCD DRIVE
Q2203-2205
Q2202,2207
S2201 (EVF ON/OFF)
3-8
CN3354
PANEL 4.6V
48
1
42
45
46
6
1
6
4
9 BL ON
VCC1 VCC2
BACK LIGHT
Q2181,2182
LED1 LED2 5
2
TIMING GENERATOR
IC2103
1
COM
D005,006 (NIGHT SHOT)
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
IC001
(4-14)
24
12
PSIG
COM
VR,VG,VB
HSY
PSIG
COM
VG
CN2104
CN2202
P UNREG
(4-73)
R,G,B
NS-12 BOARD
CN2201
CF-75 BOARD
LED ON/OFF
LED DA
CN3354
CN004 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
21 21
5
4
19 19
17 17
21 21
22
14 14
5
1
12 35
4
2
24
22
20
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/3)
TIMING GENERATOR
IC1803
(4-39)
RGB DRIVE
IC1802
VD
HD
1
8
2
1
PANEL R,G,B 2
3
27
6
2
39
HI SO,SCK
S3601 PANEL REVERSE
CN2101
CN2103
XCC DOWN
(4-53)
5
1
12
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3)
S3501 PANEL OPEN
PR-34 BOARD
(4-53)
PO-5 BOARD
TP R,TP L,TP BOT,TP TOP
40
7
5
4
1
CHIME SDA CHIME SCK CHIME VDD
I/F
OSD,CS,SO,SCK
X1102 32.768KHz
X1101 20MHz
6
38
KEY AD1
KEY AD0
97 96
100
KEY AD4
KEY AD7
KEY AD3
A 2.8V
HI UNREG
(4-45)
VDD SWITCH
IC1102
5
HI CONTROL XPHOTO FREEZE
PANEL R,G,B EVF R,G,B HD,VD
30
7
3
RESET
94
93
19
Q002-004
CN006
D 1.9V
D 3.1V
CAM -6.5V
DC/DC CONVERTER
IC1601 IC1602 IC1603
VTR DD ON
UNREG
BATT SIG
38
34
59 59
CN003
(SEE PAGE 4-65)
ZOOM VR
29
57 57
55 55
53 53
51 51
49 49
47 47
45 45
43 43
41 41
39 39
37 37
35
33
31 31
29 29
27 27
35
CN3103
PS3104
PS3103
PS3102
PS3101
START/STOP SW
EJECT SW
7
26
2
2
CN4004
BATT LI 3V
CN002
28
3
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-30350) (2/2)
17
16
33
37
36
IC1104
(4-46)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
VC-245 BOARD(3/3)
POWER SW 4
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PS-30350)
BT4001 LITHIUM BATTERY
RESET
S4006
DISPLAY SW BACK LIGHT SW
S4010,4011
FOCUS SW PHOTO REC SW SURER NIGHT SHOT SW
S4003,4005,4007,4008
PHOTO FREEZE SW
S004
3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
3
12
16
13
15
14
22
2 7 8 12 13 19
6
23
3
5
4
5
4
2
1
LCD UNIT
BACK LIGHT DRIVE
INVERTER BLOCK
LCD UNIT
CN2105 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
ND901 BACK LIGHT
7
14
7
6
5
S
BATTERY TERMINAL
CN2101
UNREG
CN2100
LCD UNIT
BACK LIGHT
PANEL 4.6V
PANEL 13.5V
PANEL 2.8V
(4-73)
PD-126 BOARD
LANC/ DIGITAL I/O
J3102
4
LCD UNIT
27
1
CF-75 BOARD(1/3)
CN2202
21 21
16 16
L1804
(4-39)
RGB DRIVE
IC1802
LED ON/OFF
EVF VCC
3-9
8
(4-39)
TIMING GENERATOR
IC1803
LCD 2.8V
LCD 13.5V
BATT SIG
LCD 4.6V
CN001
CN005
PANEL 15.5V
LCD 4.6V
LCD 13.5V
3
2
8
7
6
5
19 19
CN3354
7
6
5
14
LCD 2.8V
Q1601 SWITCHING
1
4
T1601
17 17
Q2202, 2207
BACK LIGHT DRIVE
INVERTER BLOCK
27
57 59 57 59
53 55 53 55
CN3103
CN2104
47 45 47
49 51 49 51
45
41 43 41 43
37 39 37 39
33 35 33 35
6
LED DRIVE
18
10
29 31 29 31
10
CN003
VC-245 BOARD(1/2)
D1605 RECT
D1608 RECT
D1607 RECT
D1606 RECT
VTR DD ON
VREF
EMERGENCY DETECT
Q1602, 1603
2
CTL1-6,8 CTL7
30
CT
RT
VB
VREF
OUT8
-IN8
+IN8
VDD(0)567
VDD(0)123
VSS(0)567
VSS(0)1234
VCC
VCC(0)5678
VCC(0)1234
29
35
34
33
27
3
7
8
60
49
57
46
28
55
D1609
UNREG4
UNREG3
UNREG2
UNREG
LANC DC
DC/DC CONVERTER
IC1601
+IN5
59
OUT5-2
22
58
OUT5-1
18
62
OUT6-2
+IN6
61
44
48
47
11
37
56
40
54
53
43
51
50
OUT6-1
-IN1
OUT1-2
OUT1-1
COMP
-IN4
OUT4
-IN3
OUT3-2
OUT3-1
-IN2
OUT2-2
OUT2-1
1 13
-IN7
64
OUT7-2
OUT7-1
(4-49)
1
4
Q1609 SWITCHING
Q1608 SWITCHING
Q1613 SWITCHING
Q1607 SWITCHING
Q1612 SWITCHING
Q1610 SWITCHING
Q1611 SWITCHING
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
1
CN2201
14
1
Q2203-2206
BLON
TIMING GENERATOR
Q2181,2182
(4-73)
16
POFF
Q2102, 2104
IC2103
L2103
RGB DRIVE
IC2101
CN3104
PS3104
PS3103
PS3102
PS3101
(4-69,70)
BJ-1 BOARD
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
T1602
CAP VS
D1612(2/2) RECT
DRUM VS
DRUM ERROR
Q1615 SWITCHING
L1609
CAP ERROR
Q1614 SWITCHING
L1608
Q1619 SWITCHING
L1613
3
2
8
6
5
L1620
L1615
D1612(1/2) RECT
Q1618 SWITCHING
L1612
Q1616 SWITCHING
L1610
Q1617 SWITCHING
L1611
Q1621 EMERGENCY DETECT
Q1638-1641
CAP VS
L1618
L1605
L1619
L1621
L1622
L1623
L1624
L1625
22
3
)
(4-51)
PC5/PC5E
-6.5V REG
Q1630-1632
12V REG
Q1622,1624, 1625,1628
13.5V REG
IC1603
2.8V REG
FFREW UP (IC501
5
2
Q1633-1636
Q1606 SWITCHING
L1602
Q1623 SWITCHING
L1627
Q1626,1627, 1629,1637
L1601
3.1V REG
Q1604,1605
L1626
5
(4-51)
D1611 RECT
5
D1613 RECT
(4-51)
CAM DD ON
LCD 2.8V
D 3.1V
RP 4.6V
LCD 4.6V
A 4.6V
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
PANEL 15.5V
LCD 13.5V
AU 2.8V
A 2.8V
D 2.8V
D 1.9V
D 1.5V
1
A 2.8V
DRUM ERROR
DRUM VS
CAP ERROR
CAP VS
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
RP 4.6V
A 4.6V
D 3.1V
D 1.5V
D 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 1.9V
LCD 13.5VV
LCD 4.6V
HI UNREG
1
MT 4.8V
HI UNREG
MT 4.8V
UNREG
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
2
2
3-10
EMERGENCY DETECT
Q1620
DC/DC CONV. (STEP UP)
IC1602
DC/DC CONV. (STEP UP)
IC1605
L1628
UNREG
LANC DC BATT SIG
(SEE PAGE 3-11)
TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
16
(SEE PAGE 3-10)
TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
FB201
Q1012, 1013
(4-47)
2
3
D1104
3
3
REG
(4-47)
(4-45)
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
DRUM ERROR
DRUM VS
CAP ERROR
CAP VS
RP 4.6V
A 4.6V
D 3.1V
D 1.5V
D 3.1V
D 1.5V
AU 2.8V
D 2.8V
MT 4.8V
L201
A 2.8V
D 2.8V
D 1.9V
MT 4.8V
RP 4.6V
D 3.1V
A 4.6V
4.6V
IC204
3-11
(4-33)
16Mbit SDRAM
(4-31)
RS232C I/F
FOCUS/ZOOM MOTOR DRIVE
L203
21
(4-20)
(4-21)
CAMERA CONTROL
IC1405
15
16
VIDEO LINE IN/OUT AMP
IC802
L801
AUDIO ADC&DAC
MF LED
4Mbit FLASH
(4-33)
IC1407
2
1.5V
(4-17)
(SHIORI) DIGITAL STILL PROCESS
(4-34)
IC1406
(4-30)
REC/PB AMP
(TRW)
IC102
1.5V REG
IC703
FB753
INTERFACE
DV
RESET
BATTER IN DETECT
BTT LI 3V
Q1106
IC361 (4-27)
4.6V REG
(4-19)
IRIS DRIVE IRIS HALL AMP
IC202 IC203
(4-21)
EEPROM
IC801
5
IC1003
7
PC5/PC5E
EXCEPT AEP/UK MODEL
DV SIGNAL PROCESS
IC301
(4-45)
(4-25)
(4-48)
VCC
IC1301
HI UNREG
LCD 4.6V
4
8
POWER
IC1403
(4-19)
SHUTTER DRIVE
IC201
A 4.6V
ZM RST LED
FC RST LED
A/D CONV.
LANC DC
IC1002
UNREG
1
LANC I/O
IC1103
REG
14
D 2.8V
(4-35)(4-37)
(XYZ) AUDIO I/O
IC1001
IC903
D 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 2.8V
A 2.8V
A 2.8V
D 1.9V
LCD 13.5V
LCD 4.6V
HI UNREG
MT 4.8V
UNREG
IC1101 5
PLL
EQ,
(4-29)
FB101
L102
(4-23)
A/D CONV.
(TRF)
IC101
(BIRDS+) CAMERA SIGNAL PROCESS
(4-44)
92
12
61
XRESET
(4-32)
33
Q1406,1407
MS VCC ON
IC1404
(4-24)
(GCAM3) S/H,AGC A/D CONV.
(4-43)
(4-17)
D 1.9V
A 2.8V
RP 4.6V
Q801
PC5/PC5E
I/F
Q1104
FFREW UP
XREEL HALL ON
7
IC701
22
105
CHIME PWR CONT
20
14
28
29
XPHOTO STBY SW
MECHA CONTROL
FB501
49 48
15
XVTR MODE SW
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
IB SI
IB SO
(4-46)
XCAM+STBY SW
IC501
IC752
PC4E
VTR DD SENS
XLANC ON
BATT IN
DIGITAL STILL CONTROL
16M SDRAM
PC5/PC5E
IC751
CHARACTER GENERATER
(4-28)
IC302
EVER 3.0V
38 31 42 51 VDD 63 87
EEPROM
IC502
8
4
6
ACV SENS
IC1102
91
(4-45)
VTR DD ON
CAM DD ON
BATT SENS
90
HI CONTROL
IC1104
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
BATT SIG
LANC DC
VC-245 BOARD(2/2)
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
BATT SIG
CN001
CN002
BT4001 LITHIUM BATTERY
RESET
S4006
7
2
3
4
ZOOM VR
MT 4.8V
HI UNREG
18
8
2 MEMORY STICK
PC5/PC5E
POWER LED
PITCH,YAW SENSOR
(4-15)
ZM RST LED
D 2.8V
FC RST LED
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
DRUM VS
CAP ERROR
DRUM ERROR
5
3-12E
MF VCC
SE3450,3451
CN3353
1
S1
D005,006
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
IC001
(4-14)
NIGHT SHOT LED
Q203
Q204
TIMING GENERATOR
CN001
(4-17)
IC702
11
54
52
55 55
45 45
30 30
84 84
82 82
DRUM MOTOR DRIVE DRUM FG,PG AMP LOADING MOTOR DRIVE REEL FG AMP TAPE TOP,END DET DRUM,CAP ERROR AMP
(4-41)
IC401
Q1109
Q402
CHIME VDD
CN3354
ZM RESET VCC
FC RESET VCC
MF VCC
(4-13)
CCD IMAGER
IC3201
CN3351
CN008
TAPE LED A
SENSOR VCC
CF-75 BOARD (3/3)
R424
(4-65)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-30350)
PC5/PC5E
POWER
NS-12 BOARD
MEMORY
CAMERA
OFF
VCR
(4-65,66)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-30350)
CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, CAP FG AMP
(4-42)
IC402
PITCH,YAW SENSOR AMP
IC3451
A 2.8V
LCD 4.6V
MT 4.8V
LCD 13.5V
D 2.8V
D4002
RV4001
ACCESS LED
CN4001
CF-75 BOARD(2/3)
CN4004
D 2.8V
D 2.8V
MS VCC
CN3354
CAP_VS
26 26
19 19
17 17
66 66
64 64
17
16
31
26
27
28
35
18
24
CHIME PWR CONT
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
XREEL HALL ON
20
9
15
9
10
ZOOM RESET SENSOR
FOCUS RESET SENSOR
18 FOCUS RING
LENS ASSY
(SEE PAGE 4-42)
J MECHA DECK
TAPE LED
T REEL, S REEL SENSOR
4PIN CONNECTOR
N
K
E
J
I
G
F
L
D
C 2 3
O
M
H
B
A
16 PC5/PC5E ONLY
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR
EJECT
(POWER)
START/STOP
FHOTO
CAMERA
OFF
VTR
POWER
SP901 SPEAKER
(MIC L)
(MIC R)
MIC901
5
4
BS
VSS
CASE-GND
10
11
6
DI0
NC
6
VCC
INS
5
9
NC
8
SLCK
4
7
7
VSS
VCC
3 S
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350)
2
11P
8P
6P
1
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
CN4001
XCAM+STBY_SW
GND
XVTR_MODE_SW
2
1
3
EJECT_SW
5
4
XS/S_SW
6
CN4004
POWER_LED_VCC
XPOWER_LED
7
SP+
1
8
SP-
2
MIC_L
GND
GND
MIC_R
4
3
5
6 CN4003
C Y
G W
S
ZOOM T
J4002
J4001
S VIDEO
RESET
DISPLAY
AF/MF
BACK LIGHT
INFINITY
PHOTO REC
PHOTO FREEZE
+SLOW SHUTTER
LITHIUM BATTERY
(HEADPHONE)
G
RV4001 S4006
D4002 (MS ACCESS)
S4011
S4010
S4008
S4007
S4005
S4004
S4003
4-1
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
12
13
SP+
SP-
GND
MIC_L
GND
MIC_R
GND
GND
S_Y_I/O
S_C_I/O
XS_JACK_IN
HP_JACK_IN
HP_R
HP_L
GND
BATT_LI_3V
XRESET_SW
14
15
D_2.8V
MS_LED
BS
DIO
INS
SCLK
VCC
GND
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
XCAM+STBY_SW
XVTR_MODE_SW
EJECT_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
XS/S_SW
27
28
XPOWER_LED
29
KEY_AD1
ZOOM_SW_AD
D_2.8V
NS-12 BOARD
39P
PHOTO_FREEZE
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
CN002
KEY_AD1R
KEY_AD0
GND
38
37
39
LENS-EVF BLOCK
GND 1
2
3
4
GND
GND
VIDEO HEAD
SIRCS_SIG
LCD_4.6V
XF_TALLY_LED
TALLY_LED_A
2 4 6
NS_LED_K
88P
HST
MT_4.8V
CN3354
G
COM
HCK1
HCK2 RGT
5
5
O(+)
6
7
GND
8
12
STB
10
DWN
VST
VCK
8P
9
E(-)
EN
7
88P
B
R BLK
11
E(+)
8
NC CN001
NC 1
GND
3
O(-)
13
GND
16
EVF_VCC
GND
15
CN3353
1
10
GND
18
GND
LCD_4.6V
17
14
CN3351
27P ZM_XA
CN010
10P
ZM_XB
23
FG/PG COM
8
21
FG
9
19
PG
LCD_4.6V
GND
XEVF_SW
GND
FG
PG
M
M901
DRUM MOTOR
29
V
MF_VCC
GND MF_A
31
V
33
W
MF_B
GND DRIVE-
35
W
GND
37
FP-228
FLEXIBLE
FLEXIBLE
S902 MODE SWITCH
17/19 DD-1 BLOCK
19/19 CN BLOCK
18/19 DD-2 BLOCK
16/19 AU BLOCK
15/19 HI BLOCK
14/19 MC BLOCK
13/19 MD BLOCK
12/19 VF BLOCK
11/19 IO BLOCK
FP-100
M
M903 LOADING MOTOR
10/19 IN BLOCK
9/19 MS-2 BLOCK
7/19 RF BLOCK
8/19 MS-1 BLOCK
5/19 JC-1 BLOCK
4/19 CA BLOCK
3/19 CM BLOCK
6/19 JC-2 BLOCK
2/19 LD BLOCK
27P
L
1/19 CH BLOCK
27
L
VC-245 BOARD
1
26
BIAS+
41
BIAS-
39
TAPE TOP
Q902
S903
(CC DOWN)
DEW SENSOR
TAPE END
Q901
63
CIN SW
17
XCCDOWN_SW 11
FC_RESET FC_A FC_XA
MT_GND
38 40 42 44 46 48
FC_RESET_VCC GND FC_XA FC_XB FC_A FC_B MF_B GND
ZM_XA
MT_4.8V SIRCS_SIG
MT_GND VSHT
H_GND
H_GND
V4 V3
RG
V2
H1
V1
H2 H_GND
H_GND
MSUB
12V -6.5V
CCD_GND
CCD_GND
CCD_OUT CCD_GND
CCD_GND
1
4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18 19
21 22 23 24 25
66 26
68 27
70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88
6P
CN2201
27P VCC1
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
VCC2
VVDD
VSS
EN
VST
VCK2
VCK1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
10
CLR
11
RGT
12
HST
13
14
HCK2
B
RF_MON
GND
M
M902 CAPSTAM MOTOR
20P
RF_IN/LANC_JACK_IN
SWP
GND
JIG_TDO
JIG_TDI
TCK
TMS
NC
NC
GND
NC
EVF_VCO
NC
EVF_VG
NC
CN004
LANC_SIG
NC
NC
HALL
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 LCD902
U
4-2
MR GND
27
MR GND
26
FG2
25
MR Vcc
24
17
J-100 MECHANISM
FG
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
HV(+)
R
HW(+)
BLK
HE GND
HCK1
7
UHE+
W
8
BACK-LIGHT
8
VHE+
W
9
15
9
WHE+
W
10
16
10
HE_GND
W
11
G
11
CAP_W
HW(-)
12
COM
12
CAP_W
HV(-)
13
U
16
13
CAP_W
14
U
15
14
CAP_W
15
U
14
CN009
15
WHE-
16
20
56 58 60 62 64 HALL-
T/E Sensor GND
16
VHE-
17
17
50 52
MT_GND
NS_VCC ZM_A
ZM_XB
MT4.8V
NS_LED_K XF_TALLY_LED
DRIVE+
5
23
TOP Sensor
2
17
CAP_U
18
16P
FLEXIBLE
65
LED K
16
12
TAPE_LED_K
Reel Sensor S(+)
4
24
SREEL-
V
1
18
CAP_U
19
CN2202
FP-102
TAPE LED
S901
D901
67
LED A
15
13
TAPE_LED_A
DRIVE-
CN901 3P
REC PROOF
69
MIC/REC.P GND
14
14
MIC/REC_SW_GND
END Sensor
3
25
TAPE_END
V
19
CAP_U
5
26 28 30
34
GND
HALLHALL+ GND
FC_RESET_VCC
32
36
DRIVE+ GND
GND
43 45
FC_B
47
CF-75 BOARD
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD
1
2
UL
MF_A FC_XB
49
71
REC.P SW
13
15
XREC_PROOF
26
TOP/END_GND
V
20
CAP_U
13
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD
2
25
UL
MF_VCC 51
73
MIC SCK
12
16
CHIME_SCK
27
TAPE_TOP
V
1
(BLK)
21
21
N.C.
11
3
LM_UNLOAD
LM_UNLOAD
3
24
DEW(+)
23
54
TEMP
GND ZM_RESET
53
75
MIC SDA
11
17
CHIME_SDA
1
CAP_V
2
FG1
22
22
FG1
3
22 24 NS_VCC
A_2.8V
GND
4
LM_UNLOAD
LM_UNLOAD
4
5
DEW(-)
22
ZM_RESET ZM_RESET_VCC
55
ZM_RESET_VCC ZM_B
57
BIAS+ 59
77
MIC DVV
10
18
CHIME_VDD
2
CAP_V
3
MR Vcc
23
23
FG_VCC
2
20 ZM_A
LED_DA
LCD_ON/OFF
ZM_B FG/PG COM
C_RESET
PS_OUT
YS_OUT
27
FC_RESET
DEW+
DEW+
5
6
MODE SW A MODE SW B MODE SW C
19
HALL+ MT_GND
MT_GND
61
79
Reel Sensor COM
9
19
HALL_VCC
3
CAP_V
4
24
12
10
1
PG
10
2
FG
9
1
GND
3
25
C COM U U
TEMP
DEW-
DEW-
6
21 20
MODE SW COM
18
81
Reel Sensor T(+)
4
SREEL+
8
9
2
YSDL
7
4
M COM
7
8
3
XSDL
6
5
DRUM_U
6
7
4
GND
6
5
6
DRUM_U
5
5
4
7
DRUM_V
4
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PS-30350)
1
5
6
3
8
DRUM_V
7
MODE_SW_A
MODE_SW_A
7
9
SW_COM/SW_GND 10
83
Reel Sensor T(-)
8
20
TREEL+
HU(-)
5
5
UHE-
CAP_V
25
20
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
4
7
YODD
YEVEN
2
9
DRUM_W
8
MODE_SW_B
MODE_SW_B
8
SW_COM/SW_GND
85
Reel Sensor HALL(-)
7
21
TREEL-
HE Vcc
6
6
HE VCC
26
FG2
FG_VCC
SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
10P
CN101 10
3
8
GND
XODD
2
9
XEVEN
1
DRUM_W 10
CN008
MODE_SW_C
MODE_SW_C
9 10
BIAS-
87
Reel Sensor S(-)
6
22
HALL_GND
HU(+)
7
27
FG_GND
FG_GND
TO FH(2/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-3)
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
4-3
J
I
H
BT001 BATTERY TERMINAL
S
GND 1
BJ-1 BOARD
DIGITAL I/O (LANC)
EXT MIC
J3101
TPB+ 3
J3103
TPB5
AUDIO/VIDEO
GND 7
J3102
XLANC_JACK_IN 9
G LANC_GND/232C_TD 11
F
GND 13
E
(SEE PAGE 4-2)
V_IO 15
TO FH(1/2)
GND 17
D
VC-245 BOARD
R_IO 19
C
6
GND 21
B
4
EXT_MIC_L 23
A
5
GND 25
2 3 1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
10
IB 27
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
12
UNREG 29
CN003 60P 60P CN3103
2 GND
4 TPA+
6 TPA-
8 GND
UNREG 31
LANC_DC
38
UNREG 33
LANC_SIG
14 GND
16 AV_JACK_IN
18 GND
22 GND
20 L_IO
24 EXT_MIC_R
26 GND
28 GND
30 GND
32 GND
34 GND
36 GND UNREG 35
44
42
40
7
CN3102
DV OUT
DV IN/OUT
(PC4E)
(PC5/PC5E)
UNREG2 39
GND UNREG2 37
46
UNREG2
GND
48
41
GND
50
UNREG2 43
GND
52
UNREG3 45
GND
54
UNREG3 47
GND
56
UNREG3 49
GND
58
UNREG3
GND UNREG4
51
GND
60
53
GND UNREG4 55
GND
UNREG4 57
GND UNREG4 59
CN3104
2P
8
UNREG
GND
1
2
CN006
CN005
7 8
KEY_AD2 GND
14
PANEL_15.5V
6
13
DISP_XHD
GND
12
DISP_XVD
5
11
GND
KEY_AD3
10
HI_SO
4
9
XCS_LCD
TP_TOP
8
XHI_SCK
3
7
LCD_4.6V
TP_BOT
6
LCD_13.5V
2
5
LCD_2.8V
TP_L
4
GND
1
3
PANEL_R
TP_R
2
PANEL_G
8P
1
PANEL_B
14P
(FOR CHECK)
CPC
HSY
5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
BL-LOW
10
CN2101
8P
5P
14P
4-4
S3601 (PANEL REVERSE)
PR-34 BOARD
S3501 (PANEL OPEN)
PO-5 BOARD
PD-126 BOARD
GND
UNREG
N.C.
TP_TOP
TP_BOT
N.C.
TP_L
TP_R
PSIG
4
GND
COM
CN2105
PANEL_15.5V
XHD
XVD
REG_GND
HI_SO
XCS_PANEL
XHI_SCK
PANEL_4.6V
PANEL_13.5V
PANEL_2.8V
REG_GND
PANEL_R
PANEL_G
2
1
CN2100 PANEL_B
VG
3
BL-HIGH
PIEZO TRANS UNIT
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
BL-GND
11
CN2103
CN2104
3
N.C.
TP_R
TP_L
N.C.
TP_BOT
TP_TOP
N.C.(GND)
7P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
4
TEST2/SMON1
RGT/SLR
B/VB
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
R/VR
G/VG
PSIG/PVID
HCK1/GUD
HCK2/PCTL
CRext/PCTLB
SOUT/GPWC
REF/GPWCB
HST/GCK
WIDE/GCKB
CS/GSPB
VVSSG/GSP
HVDD/GVCC
VSS/GND
18
19
21
VVDD/SVDD
20
22
VST/SSP VCK/SSPB EN/SCK
23
COM/SMON2
DWN/SCKB
24
24P TEST1/COMCNT
12
14
TOUTH PANEL
LCD901
LCD
BACK-LIGHT
13
x
E
45 6
32 1
65 4
12 3
5
32 1
4
2
54 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC • 2 : non flammable resistor • 1 : fusible resistor • C : panel designation • A : B+ Line * • B : B– Line * •J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. * • C : adjustment for repair. * • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. * * Indicated by the color red.
Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm)
Kinds of capacitor
(For schematic diagrams) • All capacitors are in mF unless otherwise noted. pF : m mF. 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums. • Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted. kW=1000W, MW=1000kW. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH TA A 2520
B
C
4-5
1.5 m
A=B
TV)
T picture fr
A
B
H
Electron beam scanned fr
A
When indicating parts by reference number, pleas include the board name.
Fig.b (Picture on monitor
B
ame 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain. CR
Fig.
a (Video output ter
P
• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. * of impedance the lens is used.). (VOM of DC 10 MΩront input • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM used.) * F atter ame 1. Connection
n bo voltage and waveform) (Measuring conditions
Yellow
(For printed wiring boards) • b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. (The other layers' patterns are not indicated.) • Through hole is omitted. • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. • There are few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t mounted in this model. • Chip parts. Transistor Diode
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
minal output w
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Cyan Green
Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue
White Magenta Red Blue
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
H
16
1
V3
2
14
C3201 10u 10V TA A
C3207 2200p B
5
1
2
3
V2
12
13
6
3
4
5
4
R12.2/P0
8
CCD IMAGER
IC3201
2
3
4
5
6
ZM_XB
ZM_A
ZM_B
NS_VCC
GND
19
20
21
22
23
24
ZM_RESET
ZM_RESET_VCC
BIAS+
HALL+
BIAS-
27
18
GND
26
17
MF_A
MF_VCC
25
16
GND
HALL-
15
MF_B
DRIVE+
14
FC_B
DRIVE-
13
FC_A
11
12
10
FC_XB
GND
9
8
FC_XA
FC_RESET_VCC
TEMP
7
1
ZM_XA
8
4-13
DRIVE-
DRIVE+
HALL-
BIAS-
HALL+
BIAS+
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_RESET
MF_VCC
MF_A
MF_B
FC_B
FC_A
FC_XB
FC_XA
FC_RESET_VCC
TEMP
FC_RESET
NS_VCC
ZM_B
ZM_A
ZM_XB
L3201 100uH 2520
0
CCD_OUT
CAM_12V
MSUB
Q3202 UN9213J-(K8).SO
R6.9/P0
R3202 0
ZM_XA
C3206 C3203 C3204 C3205 XX XX 22u 0.1u CH B 16V F TA B 1608
FC_RESET
27P
R3201 3300
R8.8/P0
C3202 10p CH
7
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE
7
6
R9.6/P0
CN3351
8
9
7
6
C3208 0.1u B 2012
10
LENS-EVF BLOCK
11
R1.6/P0
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
R6.9/P0
CCD IMAGER(CD BLOCK)
ICX228BCK
IC3201
V4
CAM_-6.5V
R-6.4/P0
V3
R-6.4/P0
V4
VL
R-0.2/P0
SUB
R-6.8/ P0.3
SUB
R-0.2/P0
V1
R1.4/P0
V2
H2
R6.8/ P0
H2
V1
H1
H1
V_HOLD
RG
RG
R12.2/P0
VDD
GND
V_DRAIN
CCD_OUT
B
4
R10.4/P0
A
5
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
1
For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-7 for CF-75 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-77 for CF-75 board waveforms.
Q3201 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 BUFFER
CCD_OUT
MSUB
H2
H1
RG
SUB
ZM_XB
ZM_B
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_RESET
FC_XB
FC_B
FC_RESET_VCC
BIAS+
BIAS-
DRIVE-
MF_A
YS_OUT
C_RESET
XEVF_SW
LED_ON/OFF
VCK
EN
RGT
HCK2
BLK
R
COM
GND
41 43
87
85
83
81
79
77
75
73
71
69
67
65
63
61
59
57
55
53
51
49
47
CCD_GND
CCD_OUT
CCD_GND
MSUB
H_GND
H2
H1
RG
H_GND
VSHT
MT_GND
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
TO VC-245 BOARD CN001
XF_TALLY_LED
NS_LED_K
MT_GND
ZM_XB
ZM_B
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_RESET
MT_GND
FC_XB
FC_B
FC_RESET_VCC
BIASBIAS+
39
GND
DRIVE-
35 37
GND
GND MF_A
33
YS_OUT
31
C_RESET
XEVF_SW
29
45
88P
LED_ON/OFF
LCD_4.6V
LCD_4.6V
GND
VCK
EN
RGT
HCK2
BLK
R
COM
CN3354
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
9
B
G
CCD_GND
CCD_GND
CAM_-6.5V
CAM_12V
H_GND
V1
V2
V3
V4
H_GND
SIRCS_SIG
MT4.8V
MT4.8V
GND
ZM_XA
ZM_A
NS_VCC
TEMP
GND
FC_XA
FC_A
FC_RESET
GND
HALL+
HALL-
GND
DRIVE+
GND
MF_B
MF_VCC
PS_OUT
A_2.8V
GND
LED_DA
GND
GND
EVF_VCC
VST
STB
DWN
HST
HCK1
10
88
86
84
82
80
78
76
74
72
70
68
66
64
62
60
58
56
54
52
50
48
46
44
42
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
CAM_-6.5V
CAM_12V
V1
V2
V3
V4
ZM_XA
ZM_A
NS_VCC
TEMP
FC_XA
FC_A
FC_RESET
HALL+
HALL-
DRIVE+
MF_B
MF_VCC
PS_OUT
LED_DA
EVF_VCC
VST
STB
DWN
HST
HCK1
B
G
11
R3351 3300
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN3353
GND
GND
GND
YS_OUT
PS_OUT
C_RESET
A_2.8V
XEVF_SW
LED_DA
LED_ON/OFF
LCD_4.6V
EVF_VCC
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
RGT
HST
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
COM
GND
SIRCS_SIG
LCD_4.6V
XF_TALLY_LED
TALLY_LED_A
NS_LED_K
MT_4.8V
8P
2 TO(2/2)
1 TO(2/2)
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D005 DCZ2805 (NIGHT SHOT)
D006 DCZ2805
D003 TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY) (TALLY)
PB
REC
CHROMA
CF-75 (1/2)
CCD IMAGER
4.6
2.8
NS-12
Y/CHROMA
/ REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
Y
4
IC001 RS-70-TU
3
1
IC001
2
15
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
LENS-EVF BLOCK is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING and SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM is omitted.
MT_4.8V
NS_LED_K
TALLY_LED_A
XF_TALLY_LED
LCD_4.6V
SIRCS_SIG
GND
GND
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES-
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
NS-12 BOARD
14
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager • The CF-75 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with a CCD imager. When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the old one and mount it onto the new one. • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section. • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC. In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts nor exposed to strong light.
YS_OUT
PS_OUT
C_RESET
XEVF_SW
LED_DA
LED_ON/OFF
EVF_VCC
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
RGT
HST
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
COM
12
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
CF-75 (2/2)
PITCH, YAW SENSOR
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
1
TO(1/2)
1
R2204 0
R2215 100k
11
R3454 22k
R0/P1.9
8
13
7
R0/ P4.6
R0/ P1.3
R2218 100k
6
15
5
C3462 10u B
16
4
17
3
R3458 15k
C3464 0.33u B 2012
18
R2212 47 R2213 47
R0/ P0.6
R0/ P1.3
R0/ P1.3
R3455 10k R3457 1M C3460 10u B 3216
R0/P0.6
C3461 10u B 3216
14
Q2203-2206 LED DRIVER
C3458 0.047u B
12
R2211 2200
R2217 100k
R2209 5600
9
R2210 XX
C3456 0.047u B
R2208 1500
R2216 100k
R0/ P1.9
10
C3459 0.047u B
7
2
19
NC .. NC .. LED2 VCC2
4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2
EN
STB
VCK
VST
GND
4-15
1
7
EVF_VCC
RGT
8
VDD
VSS
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
HST
9
HST
RGT
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
DWN
10
11
12
13
14
COM
LED1
5
8
C3466 0.1u B L3451 10uH
CN2202
16P
6P
LCD902 LCD UNIT
IC3451 UPC6756GR-8JG-E2
PITCH,YAW SENSOR AMP
IC3451
C3465 22u 4V TA P
CN2201 VCC1
6
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
1
20
15
(EVF ON/OFF)
R3453 22k
R2207 8200
C3454 0.1u B
TH2201
R2203 8200
R2205 8200
R2206 33k
R3451 22k
C3455 0.1u B
R3452 22k
C3457 0.047u B
6
16
S2201
R0/P2.8
Q2207 UN9213J-(K8).SO
R4.4/P0
R0/ P4.6
C2203 0.047u
Q2202 NDS356AP
R4.4/ P0
4.6
R2201 470k
Q2202-2207 LED ON/OFF SWITCH
C2202 0.1u
R2202 XX
C3453 22u 4V TA P
C3452 22u 4V TA P
5
G
R2214 33k
C2201 10u 6.3V
(YAW SENSOR)
SE3451
(PITCH SENSOR)
SE3450
3
COM
XEVF_SW
GND
LED_ON/OFF
LED_DA
LCD_4.6V
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
PITCH,YAW SENSOR (SE BLOCK)
4
LIB2
2 3
0.7 LIA2
1
0.9 LO2
C3463 10u B 1.4 HI2
CF-75 BOARD(2/2)
1.3 Vref2
2 1 2
AM2
4 3 4
1.4
R3459 1M 1.4
R3456 10k AM1 R1.2/P0.6 OUT2
1.4 C_RESET
For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
R0/P2.5
GND 0.6
LIB1 0.8
LIA1 1.2
VCC
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
Q2203 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
1.2
1.4 HO2 Q2205 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
LO1 Q2204 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
HI1 1.3
HO1 1.3
Vref1 1.3
PASS 2.8
OUT1 0 Q2206 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
ND902 BACK-LIGHT
9
2 TO(1/2)
CHROMA
Y
4-16
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
PB
REC
11
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
YS_OUT
C_RESET
PS_OUT
A_2.8V
GND
10
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Y/CHROMA
12
13
D
C
B
A
DEW SENSOR
FLEXIBLE
FP-228
1
M
FLEXIBLE
FP-100
S902 MODE SWITCH
M903 LOADING MOTOR
2 3
6
7
8
MODE A
MODE B
16
SW_COM
10
9
5
DEW-
MODE C
4
DEW+
3
LM_UNLOAD
2
1
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD
LM_UNLOAD
12
11 XCCDOWN_SW
10 SW_COM/SW_GND
9 XMODE_SW_C
8 XMODE_SW_B
7 XMODE_SW_A
6 DEW-
5 DEW+
4 LM_UNLOAD
3
LM_UNLOAD
2
LM_LOAD
1
LM_LOAD
4-61
FLEXIBLE
FP-102
13
TAPE_LED_K
CN901 4P
S901 (REC PROOF)
+
14
TAPE_LED_A
G
G
-
H901 S REEL SENSOR
Vcc
H902 T REEL SENSOR
+
Q901 TAPE END SENSOR
Q902 TAPE TOP SENSOR
15
MIC/REC_SW_GND
D901 (TAPE LED)
16
XREC_PROOF
S903 (CC DOWN)
17
CHIME_SCK
-
18
CHIME_SDA Vcc
19
CHIME_VDD
TO VC-245 BOARD CN008 20
HALL_VCC
7 21
TREEL+
6 22
TREEL-
5 23
HALL_GND
4 24
SREEL-
H901 S REEL SENSOR
H902 T REEL SENSOR
25
SREEL+
Q901 TAPE END SENSOR
26
TAPE_END
FP-102 FLEXIBLE BOARD
27P
— Ref. No. FP-100, 102, 228 Flexible Board; 7,000 Series —
CN901
S901 (REC PROOF)
FP-100 (MODE SWITCH), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), FP-102 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL) FLEXIBLE BOARDS
27 TAPE_TOP
TOP/END_GND
M
11
FP-100, FP-228
MODE SWITCH, DEW SENSOR
FP-102
1-677-085-
1
10
1
1
10
11
/ TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL
S902 MODE SWITCH
FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD
D901 (TAPE LED)
FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD
1-677-049-
DEW SENSOR
M903 LOADING MOTOR
S903 (CC DOWN)
Q902 TAPE TOP SENSOR
27
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
2 3
S
EJECT
G
XVTR_MODE_SW
MEMORY
CAMERA
OFF
VCR
POWER
(POWER)
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BS
VCC
DI0
NC
INS
NC
SLCK
VCC
VSS
2
4
5
6
7
8
XVTR_MODE_SW
XEJECT_SW
XS/S_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
XPOWER_LED
3
1
XCAM+STBY_SW
GND
8P
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
CN4004
GND
LND4001
11
VSS
S4006
4
RESET
4-65
R4006 1k
BT4001 (LITHIUM BATTERY)
FB4004
FB4003
D4002 TLSU1008(T05,SOY) (ACCESS)
FB4002
FB4001
CASE-GND
11P
R4008 0
VDR4005
VDR4004
VDR4003
PC5/PC5E ONLY
CN4001
LND4005
GND
XCAM_MODE_SW
START/STOP
S
VDR4001 VDR4002
Y
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR
4HPIN 2HPL 1GND
3HPR
G
C
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-30350)
PC5/PC5E ONLY
(HEADPHONE)
J4002
S VIDEO
J4001
-REF.NO.:50000 SERIES-
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-30350)
1
5
R4005 1200
BACK LIGHT
S4010
MIC901
S4007
S4011
INFINITY
S4008
FOCUS
DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL
(MIC R)
(MIC L)
SP901 SPEAKER
6
GND
SP-
SP+
560
6
5
4
3
2
1
R4001 3300 1608
PHOTO (REC)
S4005
PHOTO (FREEZE)
R4007
MIC-R
GND
MIC-L
S4004
6P
R4002 1500 1608
R4003 1200 1608
CN4003
7
8
9
WIDE
TELE RV4001 (ZOOM)
SUPER NIGHTSHOT
S4003
PB
REC
CHROMA
SP+
CN4002
GND
39
GND LND4003
GND
LND4004
GND
KEY_AD1R
KEY_AD0 38
37
ZOOM_SW_AD
PHOTO_FREEZE
36
35
KEY_AD1
D_2.8V
34
33
XPOWER_LED
XS/S_SW
32
XEJECT_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
31
30
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
26
XCAM+STBY_SW
VSS
25
29
VCC
24
XVTR_MODE_SW
SCLK
23
28
INS
22
27
DI0
21
BS
MS_LED
19 20
POWER_LED_VCC
18
XRESET_SW
GND
BATT_LI_3V
17
16
HP_L
15
HP_R
HP_JACK_IN
XS_JACK_IN
S_C_I/O
14
13
12
11
10
S_Y_I/O
YG-GND
8 9
7
GND MIC_R
6
MIC_L
GND
SP-
39P
Y/CHROMA
LND4002 GND
5
4
3
2
1
Y
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
(SEE PAGE 4-53)
TO VC-245 BOARD(19/19) CN002
AUDIO SIGNAL
10
4-66
FK-30350
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
TO PD-126 BOARD (1/2) CN2101 7 8 PIN
ACV+
LND312
(SEE PAGE 4-73)
BT001 BATTERY TERMINAL
s
IB
LND311
GND
LND316
J3101
GND
LND315
AUDIO/VIDEO
J3103
(LANC) DIGITAL I/O
J3102
PC5/PC5E
DV OUT
PC4E
-REF.NO.: SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
JACK,BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 7 6
GND L V BR SW R NC
4 R
1 GND 2 L 3 S
R3111 0
R3112 0
3
1
GND LANC_DC JACK_IN SIG 232C_TD
1
2
UNREG
GND
CN3104 2P
FB3101 0uH
2 D3101 MAZJ200D0LS0
3 2 5 1 4
TPA
4P
4
FB3104 0uH
1
NTPA 3 DV IN/OUT TPB 2
NTPB
CN3102
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE
2
1
D3102 015AZ8.2-TPL3 1 2
EXT MIC
VDR311
C3101 0.001u B
FB3103 0uH
FB3102 0uH
VDR312
R3105 0
4-69
PS3104 2A
PS3103 2A
PS3102 2A
C3103 0.001u B
R3110 0
FB3106 0uH
PS3101 2A
VDR313
4
R3101 0
FB3105 0uH
VDR319
R3102 0
R3103 0
LND314
GND
1
2
BJ-1 BOARD
2 3
VDR316 1 2
D3103 015AZ8.2-TPL3 1 2
1
2
1
VDR315
2
1
2
5
6
LND313 GND
7
CN3103
30
GND GND
Y
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA
AUDIO SIGNAL
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Y/CHROMA
60
4-70
GND
GND
GND 58 UNEG4
57 59
GND UNEG4 56
55
GND
UNEG4 54
53
GND
GND
UNEG3 52
51
GND UNEG3 48 UNEG3 50
49
GND 44 UNEG2 UNEG3 46
43
47
41
45
GND 40 UNEG2 UNEG2 GND 42
39
UNEG4
GND
UNEG2 38
37
GND
36
UNEG
34
UNEG
35
32
UNEG
33
31
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
PB
REC
TO VC-245 BOARD(19/19) CN003
GND
28
UNEG
GND
GND
26
29
GND
25 27
GND EXT_MIC_R
22
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
GND
GND
XAV_JACK_IN
GND
20
18
16
LANC_DC
24 EXT_MIC_L
L_IO
GND
14
12
GND
TPA-
TPA+
23
IB
R_IO
V_IO
GND
8
11
21
19
17
15
13
LANC_SIG_JACK
9 11
GND GND 10 XLANC_JACK_IN
7
6
TPB-
4
2 TPB+
60P
10
5
LANC_GND/232C_TD
GND
9
3
1
SIGNAL PATH
8
BJ-1
JACK, BATTERY
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
L
D
M
H
B
16
TO(2/2)
TOUCH PANEL BLOCK
(SEE PAGE 4-69)
TO BJ-1 BOARD CN3104
(SEE PAGE 4-53)
TO VC-245 BOARD (19/19) CN006
(SEE PAGE 4-39)
TO VC-245 BOARD (12/19) CN005
HI_SO 10
XHD 13
XVD 12
REG_GND 11
8
UNREG_GND
LED_ON/OFF
DET
BL_LEV
BL_ON
PWM
PANEL_4.6V
UNREG_GND
4
5
6
7
N.C.
TP_BOT
TP_TOP
N.C.
3
7
TP_L
6
N.C.
UNREG
2
5
TP_TOP
1
4
TP_BOT
N.C.
3
N.C.
TP_R
2
TP_L
7P
1
TP_R
8P
PANEL_15.5V 14
UNREG
CN2103
CN2101
7
9
6
PANEL_4.6V
8
5
PANEL_2.8V
PANEL_13.5V
XHI_SCK
4
REG_GND
XCS_PANEL
3
XHD
XVD
XHI_SO
XCS_PANEL
XHI_SCK
0
4.5
2.8
2.8
C2102 0.1u
0.1
C2104 10u 6.3V TA P
C2135 XX
R2166 10k
L2102 10uH 2520
C2134 XX
4-73
Q2112 XP4313-(TX).SO
Q2112 LED ON/OFF SW, BUFFER
0
R2175 0
0
R2173
R2174
C2101 22u 6.3V TA A
L2101 22uH 2520
C2103 0.01u B
PANEL_R
R2168 0
C2105 0.1u
C2136 XX
2.8
R2110 XX
XCS_PANEL
XHD
XVD
XHI_SO
XTG_SO
R_IN
G_IN
B_IN
XP.SAVE
LPF_ADJ
TRAP_ADJ
Vcc1
XCS
SI
XSCK
XC.SAVE
0
C2132 XX
2.8
0.7
1.2
3
2
1
36
0.8
2.8
2
34
3
33
2.7
2.6
2.2
2.6
2.9
2.5
2.5
1.4
1.4
0
2.8
2.7
XVD
VDO
SI
SO
XCS
VDD
XSCK
PFRP
FRP
SBLK
PRG
2.6
2.8 31
1.4 30
IC2101 RB5P004AM1
5
RGB DRIVE
2.8 2.8 36
7
35
0.8
2
9
2.6
1
0 1.4
6
7
1.4 29
IC2101
R2176 0
0.8
XCLP
0 32
BLK
0.8
4
Q2111 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
1
35 EXT_DA
R2114 15k
C_BG/N.C
C2107 R2170 100k 0.1u 1608 2.8
D2101 MA111-TX
XHI_SCK
PFRP
FRP
BLK
PRG
BGP
R2112 470k
R2113 0
1.8
1.8
C2110 0.01u
1.8
C2108 0.01u C2109 0.01u
2.8
1.2
2.8
2.9
2.6
2.5
2.8
1.2
R2169 0
XP.SAVE
XCS_PANEL
XTG_SO
XHI_SCK
XC.SAVE
R2111 470k
C2130 0.01u
R_INJECT
2
N.C
BGP BGP
1
SH_G
PANEL_B
C2106 XX
PRG
FRP FRP
PANEL_G
XX R2109
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
CN2100
1.4
8
34
0.8
R2118 22k
R2116 47k
BIAS
LCD DRIVE
2.7
3
28
9
0.8 33
4 2.8
6.8
1.4
10
26
4
5
6
31
2.8
C2131 XX
3.2
12
29
1.4 2.8
R2119 68k
C2113 0.1u 2012
30
1.6
11
25
1.7
5
IC2103 CXD3505R-T4
TIMING GENERATOR
IC2103
32
27
C2111 560p CH
2.8
C2112 2.2u 2012
L2103 10uH 2520
VP
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
XVP.SAVE
10
XSH.SAVE SH1 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
OP_IN-
9
SH_R SH2
2.7
SH_A XCLR
Vcc2
PRG HD
SH_B SH3
BLACK_IN SH4
PFRP SH3
N.C SH1 SHR
SH2 SHG
P_DC_DET
PFRP XWRT
R2115 2700 HDO
OP_IN+ SHB
8
DETIN
7
6
GND
SH4 SHA
OP_OUT GND
COM_DC RPD
R2117 68k BL
VCO TESTI 7
VG
28
1.3
R2125 XX
R2122 1M
R2124 100k
6.5
9
1.0
10
26
C2119 2.2u
11
25
12
8
C2118 2.2u
2.8
2.8
NC
POFF
RGT
HCK1
HCK2
HST
VDD
WIDE
DWN
EN
VCK
VST
0
2.8
0
0
0.1
1.6
2.7
1.2
1.9
0.8
2.8
0
R2128 XX
R2126 XX
R2177 100k
C2122 XX F
R2171 XX
VR
VG
R2179 100k
R2135 XX
R2129 0
R2178 100k
TG43
TG47
TG10
TG11
TG12
TG13
TG14
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG18
TG19
TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
R2180 100k
VB
R2165 0
L2105 XX 2520
VP
13
C2121 XX F
R2127 XX
C2137 XX
C2120 2.2u
1.3
C2117 100p CH
C2116 0.001u L2104 2.7uH
27
0
6.2
6.2
14.4
6.7
1.7
6.8
1.7
6.8
1.7
6.8
D2102 1T369-01-T8A
R2123
COM_IN
COM_OUT
Vcc3
VREF
GND1
GND2
R_DC_DET
VR
G_DC_DET
2.2 0 1.8
8
VB
14.4
C2115 3.3u 20V TA A
12 11
B_DC_DET
XC.SAVE XCSAVE
PD-126 BOARD(1/2)
6
TESTI
A
5
OSCI
XP.SAVE
4
PWM
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 OSCO
C2114 0.01u LED
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
XSTBY
VB
1
TEST
VR
R2134 10
14
13 TEST
VG
R2136 10
For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-77 for waveforms.
TEST
VP R2138 100
R2137 10
13
C
2 3
TG47
TG43
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG19
R2143 10k
6.2
Q2101 XP4601-TXE
15.1
R2146
R2145
6.8
0
7.3
R2150 XX
R2153
Q2108 XX
R2154 XX
C2138 XX 1608
R2158 68k
R2155 XX R2160 820k
(Note)
C2129
4-74
C2127 0.1u
R2157 1M
150k
0
D2103 XX
R2159
C2128 0.1u
R2162 0
R2161 XX
15
Note:Short is mounted to the location where C2129 is printed.
Q2106 XX
6.8
0
Q2107 XX
R2151 XX
R2152 XX
Q2103 XP4601-TXE
15.1
R2172 0
C2126 4.7u 3216
Q2105 XX
C2125 0.01u
15.1
R2147 0
0
R2149 XX
6.2
R2148 10k 7.3
6.8
XX
R2163 0
XX
R2142
TG10
XX
R2140
XX
XX
R2139
R2141
6.8
2.8
0
Q2104 NDS356AP
Q2102 UN9213J-(TX).SO
C2124 0.01u
TG11
TG18
TG20
TG12
TG13
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
TG16
TG15
TG14
C2123 3.3u 20V TA A
R2144 470k
15.1
Q2102,2104 SWITCH
14
Q2109 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
C2133
D2104 RD3.3UM-T1B
D2105 XX
17
1u
PB
REC
VG COM GND PSIG HSY
3 4 5
5P
CN2105
1
2
TEST2
2
1
RGT
3
24P
B
4
Y
CN2104
PSIG
R
5
HCK1
G
6
CRext
7
SOUT
HCK2
REF 10
8
HST 11
9
WIDE 12
VVSSG
13
VDDG
CS
VSS
14
15
VDD
16
DWN 18 17
19
COM
VCK EN
22
20
23
21
TEST1
VST
24
CHROMA
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
18 16
(FOR CHECK)
CPC
LCD901 2.5 INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
Y/CHROMA
PD-126 (1/2)
LCD DRIVE
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
PD-126 (2/2)
LCD DRIVE
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
4-75
E
D
C
B
A
2 3
16
TO(1/2)
DET
LED_ON/OFF
BL_LEV
PWM
BL_ON
UNREG_GND
PANEL_4.6V
UNREG
C2181 100u 6.3V B TA
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
LCD DRIVE
R2185 XX
R2184 0
C2182 0.1u B
PD-126 BOARD(2/2)
1
C2183 100u 6.3V B TA
L2182 100uH
L2181 4.7uH
For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-71 for printed wiring board.
C2184 0.1u B
4.5
C2186 0.1u
4.5
R2183 100
2.7
R2181 4700 3.8
5
0
D2181 PG1111R-TR
4.5
6
VDD
LND282
PANEL_UNREG
LND281
BL_PWM
LND284
INVERTER UNIT
7
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
4-76
UNREG_GND
LND283
Q2181 UN9214J-(K8).SO
Q2182 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
R2186 XX
R2182 1k
4.5
Q2181,2182 SWITCH
Q2183 LED DRIVER
1.5
Q2183 UN9112J-(K8).SO
C2185 10u 10V A
4
BL_LOW
BL_GND
BL_HI
DET
LND285
DUMY_LND
9
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
8
ND901 BACK-LIGHT
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
4-3. WAVEFORMS
PD-126 BOARD (1/2)
CF-75 BOARD CAMERA REC
REC/PB
1 IC2101 rh
1 IC3201 1
9 IC2103 rk
400mVp-p
7.7Vp-p H
H
2.8Vp-p V
2 IC2101 rj
2 IC3201 2
9.2Vp-p
400mVp-p
V
H
3 IC2101 rk
3 IC3201 3
7.8Vp-p
450mVp-p
H
H
4 IC2101 w;
4 IC3201 4
8.6Vp-p 7.4Vp-p
V
2H
5 IC2101 ws
5 IC3201 qd
20.8Vp-p H
7.4Vp-p 2H
6 IC2101 wf
6 IC3201 qa, qs
7.4Vp-p
3.5Vp-p
2H
H
7 IC2103 1
7 IC3201 0
2.8Vp-p 3.2Vp-p
H
55.6 nsec
8 IC2103 wh
8 Q3201 E
1.0Vp-p 0.44 µsec
3.0Vp-p 56 nsec
4-77
WAVEFORMS CF-75, PD-126
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION CF-75 BOARD (SIDE A)
NS-12 BOARD (SIDE A)
BJ-1 BOARD (SIDE A)
PD-126 BOARD (SIDE A)
C2201 C2202 C2203 C3201 C3202 C3203 C3205 C3206 C3207 C3208 C3454 C3455 C3456 C3457 C3458 C3459 C3460 C3461
D003 D005 D006
A-2 A-2 A-1
C3101 C3103
IC001
A-1
C2101 C2102 C2103 C2104 C2105 C2106 C2107 C2108 C2109 C2110 C2111 C2112 C2113 C2114 C2115 C2116 C2117 C2118 C2119 C2120 C2121 C2122 C2123 C2124 C2125 C2126 C2127 C2128 C2129 C2130 C2131 C2132 C2133 C2134 C2135 C2136 C2137 C2138 C2181 C2182 C2183 C2184 C2185 C2186
C-1 D-1 D-1 C-1 C-1 D-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 C-1 C-2 D-2 C-2 D-2 D-3 C-2 C-2 D-2 D-3 D-2 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-3 C-3 B-3 C-3 B-3 B-2 D-1 C-2 C-1 B-2 D-1 D-1 C-1 D-2 C-3 C-3 B-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 D-3
CN2100 CN2101 CN2103 CN2104 CN2105
C-1 B-1 B-3 B-2 D-3
D2101 D2102 D2103 D2104 D2105 D2181
C-1 C-2 B-2 B-2 B-3 A-3
B-4 B-4 B-4 C-6 C-7 C-7 C-7 C-7 C-6 A-4 E-3 E-3 E-3 E-3 E-3 E-3 E-4 E-4
CN2202 E-1 CN3351 A-4 CN3353 A-4 IC3201 D-6 IC3451 E-4 L3201
C-7
Q2202 Q2203 Q2204 Q2205 Q2206 Q2207 Q3201 Q3202
B-4 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 B-4 C-7 C-7
R2201 R2202 R2203 R2204 R2205 R2206 R2207 R2208 R2209 R2210 R2211 R2212 R2213 R2214 R2215 R2216 R2217 R2218 R3201 R3202 R3351 R3452 R3453 R3454 R3455 R3456 R3457 R3459
B-4 B-4 E-1 B-4 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 C-7 C-7 A-4 E-3 E-3 E-3 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4
S2201
E-5
CF-75 BOARD (SIDE B) C3204 C3452 C3453 C3462 C3463 C3464 C3465 C3466
C-9 E-12 E-12 E-12 E-12 E-12 E-12 E-12
CN3102 C-3 CN3103 B-6 CN3104 F-9 D3101 D3102 D3103
C-2 C-2 C-2
FB3101 FB3102 FB3103 FB3104 FB3105 FB3106
A-2 A-2 A-2 B-2 B-2 B-2
J3101 J3102 J3103
G-2 E-2 F-2
PS3101 PS3102 PS3103 PS3104
E-9 E-9 E-9 E-9
R3101 R3102 R3103 R3105 R3110 R3111 R3112
B-1 C-2 B-2 C-2 B-1 B-2 A-2
VDR311 VDR312 VDR313 VDR315 VDR316 VDR319
B-2 B-2 B-2 A-2 A-2 C-2
CN2201 E-15 CN3354 B-10 L3451
E-12
R3451 R3458
E-12 E-12
SE3450 E-12 SE3451 E-12
IC2101 D-2 IC2103 B-2
TH2201 E-15
PARTS LOCATION CF-75, NS-12, BJ-1, PD-126
A-2 A-2
4-82E
L2101 L2102 L2103 L2104 L2105 L2181 L2182
C-1 C-1 D-2 C-2 B-1 C-3 C-3
Q2101 Q2102 Q2103 Q2104 Q2105 Q2106 Q2107
D-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-2 B-2 B-1
Q2108 Q2109 Q2111 Q2112 Q2181 Q2182 Q2183
B-1 B-3 C-2 B-3 C-3 D-3 B-3
R2109 R2110 R2111 R2112 R2113 R2114 R2115 R2116 R2117 R2118 R2119 R2122 R2123 R2124 R2125 R2126 R2127 R2128 R2129 R2134 R2135 R2136 R2137 R2138 R2139 R2140 R2141 R2142 R2144 R2145 R2146 R2147 R2148 R2149 R2150 R2151 R2152 R2153 R2154 R2155 R2157 R2158 R2159 R2160 R2161 R2162 R2163 R2165 R2166 R2168 R2169 R2170 R2171 R2172 R2173 R2174 R2175 R2176 R2177 R2178 R2179 R2180 R2181 R2182 R2183 R2184 R2185 R2186
D-1 D-1 D-1 C-1 B-1 D-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-2 C-2 C-3 D-3 C-3 C-2 C-3 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-3 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 C-3 C-3 B-1 C-3 C-3 B-2 B-3 C-2 B-3 B-3 B-3 A-3 B-3 C-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-2 C-2 B-3 B-3 D-1 D-1 C-2 D-3 B-3 D-1 D-1 C-1 C-2 B-3 C-2 C-2 C-2 D-3 D-3 A-4 B-2 D-2 D-3
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E SECTION 5 ADJUSTMENTS 1.
Before starting adjustment EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1 Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced. (Machine before starting repair)
PC
PC
(Machine after a board is replaced)
Download the saved data to a machine.
Save the EVR data to a personal computer.
Procedure 2 Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM to the replaced board. Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board)
(New board)
Procedure 3 When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it. (Machine to be repaired)
PC
(Machine to be repaired)
Download the data. Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 5-3 for the items to be checked.)
5-1
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. • Adjusting items when replacing main parts When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. Note1: When replacing the drum assy. or the mechanism deck, reset the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “54. SERVICE MODE”) Replaced parts
IC101 (EQ, A/D CONV., PLL)
IC102 (REC/PB AMP)
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC1301 (LINE IN/OUT AMP)
IC301 (DV signal process)
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC751 (Camera process, EVR)
IC204 (Lens pre-driver)
VC-245 board
IC701 (CDS, AGC, A/D conv.) VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC3201 (CCD imager) CF-75 board
IC702, X701 (Timing generator)
IC1803 (Timing generator (EVF)) VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC2103 (Timing generator (LCD))
IC1802 (RGB driver (EVF)) VC-245 board
IC2101 (RGB driver (LCD)) PD-126 board
PD-126 board
SE3450/3451 (PITCH/YAW sensor) CF-75 board
Mechanism deck M902 (Capstan motor)
Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy) Note1
(FK-30350)
Touch panel LCD block
Parts replacement
Control switch board
ND901 (Fluorescent tube (LCD))
Inverter unit (LCD) LCD block
LCD901 (LCD panel (LCD))
LCD block
Initialization of B page data *1
LCD block
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
of B, C, D, E,
Color EVF block LED902 (Back light LED (EVF))
Initialization
Mechanism deck Note1
Adjustment
Lens device
Adjustment Section
Color EVF block LCD902 (LCD panel (EVF))
Block replacement
F, 7, 8 page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data z
36MHz origin oscillation adj.
Camera
HALL adj.
z
Flange back adj.
z
z
Optical axis adj.
z
z
z
z
z
MAX GAIN adj.
z
z
AWB & LV standard data input
z
z
Auto white balance adj.
z
z
z z
Steady shot check
z
VCO adj. z
Bright adj. Contrast adj. z z
White balance adj. Bright adj.
z
Black limit adj.
z
Contrast adj.
z
Servo, RF
Video
V-COM adj.
z
z
White balance adj.
z z z
z
z
z
z
Serial No. input z
Touch panel adj. CAP FG duty adj.
z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj.
z
z
z
Switching position adj.
z
z
AGC center level adj.
z
z
APC & AEQ adj.
z
z
z z z z z z z
Chroma BPF fo adj.
z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj.
z z z z
S VIDEO OUT Cr, Cb level adj. Mechanism
z
z
z
Center level adj.
System control
z z
VCO adj.
LCD
z z
Color reproduction adj.
Mechanical shutter adj.
Color EVF
z
z
Zoom key center adj.
Tape path adj.
z
z z
Table. 5-1-1(1).
5-2
• Adjusting items when replacing a board or EEPROM When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. *1: DCR-PC5/PC5E model only
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
z
of B, C, D, E,
Initialization of B page data *1
z
Color EVF
LCD
System control
Servo, RF
Video Mechanism
z z
z
z
36MHz origin oscillation adj.
z
z
Zoom key center adj.
z
z
HALL adj.
z
z
Flange back adj.
z
z
Optical axis adj.
z
z
Color reproduction adj.
z
z
MAX GAIN adj.
z
z
AWB & LV standard data input
z
z
Auto white balance adj.
z
z
Mechanical shutter adj.
z
z
Steady shot check
z z
z
VCO adj.
z
z
Bright adj.
z
z
Contrast adj.
z
z
White balance adj.
z
VCO adj.
z
z
z
Bright adj.
z
z
z
Black limit adj.
z
z
z
Contrast adj.
z
z
z
Center level adj.
z
z
z
V-COM adj.
z
z
z
White balance adj.
z
z
Serial No. input
z
z
Touch panel adj.
z
z
CAP FG duty adj.
z
z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj.
z
z
Switching position adj.
z
z
AGC center level adj.
z
z
APC & AEQ adj.
z
z
Chroma BPF fo adj.
z
z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj.
z
z
S VIDEO OUT Cr, Cb level adj.
z
z
F, 7, 8 page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
IC502 (EEPROM)
Initialization
IC1407 (Flash memory) *1
VC-245 board
Adjustment
VC-245 board
(COMPLETE)
IC801 (EEPROM)
PD-126 board
Adjustment Section
VC-245 board
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
VC-245 board
CF-75 board
Board replacement
z
z
Tape path adj.
Table. 5-1-1(2).
5-3
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT 1-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)
1-1-1. List of Service Tools • Oscilloscope • Regulated power supply
Ref. No.
• Color monitor • Digital voltmeter
Name
• Vectorscope
Parts Code
Usage
ND filter 1.0
Auto white balance adjustment/check White balance adjustment/check J-6080-808-A White balance check
J-2
ND filter 0.4 ND filter 0.1
J-6080-806-A White balance check J-6080-807-A White balance check
J-3 J-4
Pattern box PTB-450 Color chart for pattern box
J-6082-200-A J-6020-250-A
J-1
Filter for color temperature correction (C14)
J-6080-058-A
J-6
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded). J-6082-053-B (Note 1) Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-7
Clear chart for pattern box
J-6080-621-A
J-8
CPC-6 flexible jig (Note 2)
J-6082-370-B
J-9
CPC-6 terminal board jig
J-6082-371-A
J-10
Mini pattern box
For adjusting the video section For adjusting the color viewfinder J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-11
Camera table
J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back
J-5
Note 1: If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), the pages cannot be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro processor (8-759-148-35).
For adjusting the video section For adjusting the color viewfinder
Note 2: When using the old CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-A), open the cabinet (R) assembly.
J-1
J-2
J-3
J-4
J-5
J-6
J-7
J-8
J-9
J-10
J-11
Fig. 5-1-1.
5-4
1-1-2.
Preparations
Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2. DISASSEMBLY”. Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards need not be disassembled.
1)
Pattern box
Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-2.
Note 3: As removing the control switch block (FK-30350)(removing the VC-245 board CN002) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (BT4001), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the cabinet (R) has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on history of use (total drum rotation time etc. ) will be lost. Before removing, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page:2, address: B0 to C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to AA). (Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for the selfdiagnosis data, and to “5-4.Service Mode” for the data on the history use.)
1.5 m
Front of the lens
Note 4: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on with the control switch block (FK-30350) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”.
Fig. 5-1-2.
Note 5: Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-5
Cabinet (R)
Must be connected when performing the LCD system adjustments.
PO-5 board
CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A)
Lens block
CN3351
View finder
CF-75 board
CN3353
CN002
CN3354
NS-12 board CN009
CN001
CN004
CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B)
CN005
Adjustment remote commander
VC-245 board CN006
CN003
Must be connected when performing the video or EVF system adjustments. Must be connected.
J310
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
LANC jack
J3101
CN3103
Battery terminal
J3102 CN3102
BJ-1 board CN3104
VIDEO (Yellow)
Terminated at 75Ω
AUDIO Left (White) AUDIO Right (Red)
Color monitor
Vector scope
AC power adaptor AC-VF10 or AC-VQ11
Fig. 5-1-3.
5-6
1-1-3. Precaution 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments without loading cassette. 1. 2. 3.
POWER (Control switch block) ............................ CAMERA NIGHT SHOT (Lens block) ............................................ OFF FUNCTION settings of the touch panel DIGITAL EFFECT ..................................................... OFF EXPOSURE ................................................................ OFF MANUAL SET of the MENU settings PROGRAM AE ................................................ AUTO PICTURE EFFECT .............................................. OFF WHITE BALANCE .......................................... AUTO
CAMERA SET of the MENU settings DIGITAL ZOOM .................................................. OFF 16:9 WIDE ............................................................ OFF STEADY SHOT ................................................... OFF SETUP MENU of the MENU settings DEMO MODE ...................................................... OFF FOCUS (FK-30350 block) .......................................... Manual BACK LIGHT (FK-30350 block) .................................... OFF
4. 5.
2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given. Electronic beam scanning frame
H C
A B
A=B
C=D
D CRT picture frame
Y
ello
an Green White w Magenta Cy Red Blue
Y
ello
an Green White Magenta w Red Cy Blue
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )
V
B A
Fig. b (TV monitor picture)
Enlargement
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Difference in level
B
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.
A
Fig.5-1-4. 3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-4. (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time.) 3) Flange back adjustment chart Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-5 using A0 size (1189mm × 841mm) black and white vellum paper.
White 841mm Black
1189mm
Fig. 5-1-5. Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
5-7
1-2.
INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA
1-2-1.
Processing after Completing Modification of C, D, 8 Page data Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2
INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA
2 2
00 01
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data Note:
Note1: If “Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data” is performed, all data of the C page, D page and 8 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.) Note2: If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, the following adjustments need to be performed again. 1) Modification of C, D, 8 page data 2) Serial No. input 3) Servo and RF system adjustments 4) Video system adjustments 5) Color viewfinder system adjustments 6) LCD system Adjustments
29 29
Set the data Set the data, and press the PAUSE button.
If the following symptoms occur after completing of the “Modification of C, D, 8 page data”, check that the data of the “Fixed data-2” addresses of D page are same as those of the same model of the same destination. 1) The battery end mark on the LCD or viewfinder screen is flashing. 2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
3. C Page Table
Adjusting page
C
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data”.)
Adjusting Address Adjusting page
10 to FF D
Address
Adjusting Address Adjusting page
10 to FF 8
Adjusting Address
00 to FF
Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1 2
0 3
01 81
01
Set the data Check that the data is “00”.
3
3
80
0A
Set the data, and press the PAUSE button.
4
3
80
5
00 to 0F 10 11 12 13 14 to 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 to 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A to 2B 2C 2D to 3F 40 41 42 43 to 48 49 4A 4B to 4C 4D 4E to 4F 50 51
Check that the data changes to “1A” Perform “Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data”.
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
3)
4)
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value.
5-8
Initial value EE 00 00 00 E0 2A 2A 32 32 25 3E 3E D5 99 88 E3 A1 04 20 03
Remark Switching position adj.
Fixed data-1 Cap FG duty adj. Fixed data-2 AEQ adj. Fixed data-1 AEQ adj. Fixed data-1 AGC center level adj. PLL fo adj. APC adj. LPF fo adj. Fixed data-1 S VIDEO out Y level adj. S VIDEO out Cr level adj. S VIDEO out Cb level adj. Chroma BPF fo adj. PLL fo fine adj. Fixed data-1 APC adj. Fixed data-1(Initialized data) Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1(Initialized data) Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
Address 52 to 63 64 65 to 85 86 87 88 89 8A to 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 to A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 to AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB to C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 to CB CC CD to D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD
Initial value
Remark
Address DE to E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF F0 to F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
Initial value
08 00 46 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Remark Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Serial No. input
Fixed data-1 Emergency memory address
Table. 5-1-2.
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
5-9
4. D Page Table Address Initial value NTSC PAL 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E to 60 61 62 to 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B to 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 3B 58 [4B] 93 58 3B [20] 94 95 8F 8F 96 97 80 80 98 80 80 99 38 38 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 5C 7E A3 7E 5C A4 A2 A2 A5 B0 B0 A6 08 08 A7 A8 90 90 A9 6F 6F AA 2D 2D AB 2D 2D AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data”.)
Address Initial value NTSC PAL 00 to 0F 10 00 00 11 to 12 13 14 15 to 19 1A 1B to 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 to 32 33 34 to 41 42 43 44 45 46 to 47 48 49 4A to 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Remark
Test mode Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
5-10
Remark Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) VCO adj. (EVF) [ ] : DCR-PC4E Fixed data-2 Bright adj.(EVF) Fixed data-2 White balance adj. (EVF) Contrast adj. (EVF) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
VCO adj. (LCD) V-COM adj. (LCD) Bright adj. (LCD) Black limit adj. (LCD) Fixed data-2 White balance adj. (LCD) Contrast adj. (LCD) Center level adj. (LCD) Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
5. 8 Page Table Address Initial value NTSC PAL B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB to C1 C2 C3 to C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 to CB CC CD to D0 D1 D2 to D5 D6 D7 D8 to D9 DA DB DC DD DE to DF E0 D0 D0 E1 26 26 E2 CE CE E3 1E 1E E4 to FF
Remark
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Address
Remark
00 to 52 53 54 to 59 5A 5B
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) 5C to 98 Fixed data-1 99 Fixed data-2 9A to A7 Fixed data-1 A8 Fixed data-2 A9 to FF Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
Table. 5-1-4.
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Touch panel adj.
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-3.
5-11
1-2-2.
INITIALIZATION OF B PAGE DATA (DCR-PC5/PC5E)
Processing after Completing Modification of B Page data: Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note: When reading the B page data, insert a “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot.
1 2
Switch setting: POWER ................................................................. MEMORY
Note: If the B page data has been initialized, the following adjustments need to be performed again. 1) Modification of B page data
B
Adjusting Address
00 to FF
Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data
00 to 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A to 4F 50 51 to 53 54 55 to 6F 70 71 to FF
Procedure
0 2
01 8F
01 02
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
3
2
8F
03
4
2
8F
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
5
2
8F
00
6
5
0E
00
7
5
01
F3
8
5
00
01
9
5
0E
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”.
2. Modification of B Page Data If the B page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.
1
2
8F
02
2
2
8F
03
3
2
8F
02
4
2
8F
00
Procedure Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
3)
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Remark Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-5.
Perform “Modification of B Page Data”.
Preparations: Order Page Address Data
29 29
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B Page Data”.)
Address
1 2
10
00 01
3. B Page Table
1. Initializing the B Page Data
Adjusting page
2 2
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
5-12
1-2-3.
3. F Page Table
INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA
Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data”.)
1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data Note1: If “Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data” is performed, all data of the E page, F page and 7 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.) Note2: If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, following adjustments need to be performed again. 1) Modification of E, F, 7 page data 2) Camera system adjustments 3) IR transmitter adjustments
Adjusting page
F
Adjusting Address Adjusting page
10 to FF E
Adjusting Address Adjusting page
00 to FF 7
Adjusting Address
00 to 59
Address Initial value NTSC PAL 00 to 0F 10 to 11 12 80 80 13 80 80 14 to 16 17 81 81 18 A0 A0 19 17 17 1A to 1C 1D 9A 9A 1E 80 80 1F 7A 7A 20 to 30 30 90 90 31 3E 3E 32 43 43 33 59 59 34 35 22 22 36 37 27 24 38 to 3B 3C 00 00 3D F1 EF 3E to 3F 40 80 80 41 40 40 42 to 49 4A 51 51 4B 19 19 4C 22 22 4D 20 20 4E 93 93 4F 13 13 50 00 00 51 00 00 52 to 59 5A 46 46 5B 00 00 5C 19 19 5D 00 00 5E 2A 2A 5F 00 00 60 to 65 66 67 68 69 00 00 6A to 6F 70 C4 C4
Switch setting: POWER .................................................................. CAMERA Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data 1 2
0 6
01 01
3
6
03
4
6
02
5
01
01
Procedure Set the data. Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 2D: DCR-PC5 (NTSC) 2F: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”. Perform “Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data”.
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
3)
4)
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 7 Page data 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 2) Turn off the power and turn on again.
5-13
Remark
Fixed data-1 36MHz origin osc adj. Zoom key center adj. Fixed data-1 HALL adj.
Fixed data-1 Max gain adj. AWB & LV standard data input Fixed data-1 AWB & LV standard data input
Fixed data-1 Color reproduction adj. Fixed data-1 Color reproduction adj. Fixed data-1 Color reproduction adj. Fixed data-1 Auto white balance adj. Fixed data-1 Flange back adj.
Fixed data-1 Flange back adj.
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Optical axis adj. Fixed data-1 Mechanical shutter adj.
4. E Page Table Address Initial value NTSC PAL 71 0E 0E 72 75 75 73 0C 0C 74 26 26 75 0B 0B 76 35 35 77 0A 0A 78 6E 6E 79 09 09 7A A5 A5 7B 61 61 7C A1 A1 7D 79 79 7E 64 64 7F 81 81 80 82 82 81 84 84 82 B5 B5 83 7B 7B 84 20 20 85 to 8D 8E 8F 90 to 9E 9F A0 to AF B0 B1 B2 to B3 B4 B5 to D0 D1 D2 to D4 D5 D6 to DC DD DE to FF
Remark
Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data”.)
Mechanical shutter adj.
Address Initial value NTSC PAL 00 to 64 65 66 to 69 6A 6B to 71 72 73 74 to 7E 7F 80 to 83 84 85 86 87 88 to 8B 8C 8D to 8E 8F 90 91 92 to 94 95 96 to 97 98 99 to AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 to CE CF D0 26 24 D1 to DD DE 5F 71 DF to FF
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-6.
Remark Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Optical axis adj. Fixed data-1 Optical axis adj. Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-7.
5-14
5. 7 Page Table Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data”.)
Address Initial value NTSC PAL 00 to 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 to 22 23 24 25 26 27 to 3C 3D 3E to 51 52 53 54 to 59
7C 7F 7C 7B
7C 7F 7C 7B
Remark Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Mechanical shutter adj.
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-8.
5-15
1-3.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are satisfied. Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5 PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
2. Zoom Key Center Adjustment
1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-245 board) Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization. If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will become inconsistent. Subject Not required
Set the A/D value center of the microprocessor to the center voltage of the zoom key. If deviated, the zoom lens operates of itself ,even if the zoom key is the center position.
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Pin qs of IC702 Frequency counter
Subject Measurement Point
Not required Display data of page: 6, address: 50
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
F 12
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander F
Specified Value
Pin qs of IC702: f=18000000 ± 90Hz
Adjustment Address
13
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2
0 F
01 12
3 4
F 0
12 01
01
00
24
Note: Don’t touch the zoom lever during adjustment.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data
Procedure Set the data. Change the data and set the frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Set the data.
13 12
25 36
1 37
48
IC702
VC-245 board (SIDE B)
Fig. 5-1-6.
5-16
Procedure
1 2
0 6
01 50
01
Set the data. Read the data, and this data is named D50.
3
F
13
D50
4
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
3. HALL Adjustment For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and offset. Subject Not required Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Display data of page 1 (Note1) Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
F 17, 18, 19
Specified Value 1 Specified Value 2
15 to 19 88 to 8C
Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX IRIS display data
Switch setting: POWER .................................................................. CAMERA Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3
6 6
94 95
17 8A
Set the data. Set the data.
4
6
01
6D
5
6
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note2)
6
6
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 17, 18, 19.
Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 04 03 Set the data. 2
6
3
1
4
6
5
1
01
01
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the IRIS display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value 1.
01
03
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the IRIS display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value.2.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 94 00 Set the data. 2 3
6 6
95 01
00 00
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
4 5
6 0
04 01
00 00
Set the data. Set the data.
5-17
4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing. Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for the minipattern box (Note1) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Display data of page: F, address: 5F Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
F 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Specified Value
Upper digit: 0 to B Lower digit: 0 to 9
Note1: Dark Siemens star chart. Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF Preparations: 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following figure.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the specified voltage. Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure screen coincide.
2
6
01
13
3
6
01
27
4
6
02
5
F
5F
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box.
6
F
5F
2) 3) 4) 5)
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note3) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note4) Check that the upper digit of the data is “0” to “B”. Check that the lower digit of the data is “0” to “9”.
Note3: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t correct. Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
Below 3 cm Minipattern box
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure
Camcorder Camera table Regulated power supply Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc Output current : more than 3.5A
6
01
00
2
0
01
00
3
Red (+) Black (–) Yellow (SENS +) White (SENS –)
1
Need not connected
Black (GND)
Fig. 5-1-7.
5-18
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Perform “Flange Back Check”.
5. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject More Than 500m Away) The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing. 5-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment (1)”. Subject Subject more than 500m away (Subjects with clear contrast such as buildings, etc.)
5-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) Subject Flange back adjustment chart (2.0 m from the front of the protection glass) (Luminance: 350 ± 30 lux) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Display data of page: F, address: 5F Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
F 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Specified Value
Upper digit: 0 to B Lower digit: 0 to 9
3
0 6 6
01 01 01
4
6
02
5
F
5F
6
F
5F
01 13 15
Procedure Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2) Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2
Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note3) Check that the upper digit is “0” to “B”. Check that the lower digit is “0” to “9”.
2
01
00
0 6
01 01
3
6
01
4
6
02
01 13
29
Procedure Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2) Place a ND filter on the lens so that the optimum image is obtain. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note3)
Note2: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t correct. Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 6
F 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Preparations: 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should not be in the screen.)
Note2: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t correct. Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
1
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
1 2
Check operation on TV monitor
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Perform “Flange Back Adjustment (2)”
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1
6
01
00
2
0
01
00
3
5-19
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Perform “Flange Back Check”.
6. Flange Back Check Subject Siemens star (2.0m from the front of the lens) (Luminance : approx. 200 lux) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Check operation on TV monitor
Specified Value
Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end.
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF 4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF Note: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1) Select page: 6, address: 04, and set data: 0F. 2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus. 1 : 00 : XX Focused [ Odd: Even: Unfocused
Checking method: 1) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens. 2) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image. 3) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 4) Turn on the auto focus. 5) Check that the lens is focused (Note). 6) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 10. 7) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 8) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 6, address: 04, and set data: 00.
5-20
7. Optical Axis Adjustment Align the lens Optical Axis with that of the CCD imager. If deviated, center of picture can lose focus when zoom is operated from the WIDE end to the TELE end. Subject Siemens star Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Check on the monitor TV
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
F 69
Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5 PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Area
E D0, DE
1 2
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
3
Preparations before adjustments: 1) Playback the monoscope segment of the system check tape (XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL)). 2) Attach the optical axis frame chart (transparent) on the monitor TV screen. Center of monoscope image and that that of optical axis frame must be agree. 3) Set to the camera mode.
4 5 6 7
Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 02. 3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 01. 4) Input the data of Table 5-1-9 to each adjustment addresses.
8
00
22.6° to 67.5° 67.6° to 112.5° 112.6° to 157.5° 157.6° to 202.5° 202.6° to 247.5° 247.6° to 292.5° 292.6° to 337.5° 337.6° to 22.5°
Connection data Page: F Page: E Address: 69 Address: D0 Address: DE NTSC PAL NTSC PAL 01 22 26 57 69 02
22
26
5F
71
03
22
26
67
79
04
02
26
69
7D
05
22
26
67
79
06
22
26
5F
71
07
22
26
57
69
08
02
26
55
65
Table. 5-1-10.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
Page: F Address: 69
Display phase
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 00. 3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 00.
Page: E Address: D0 Address: DE NTSC PAL NTSC PAL 22 26 5F 71
Table. 5-1-9. 5) 6) 7)
Place the Siemens star 2.0 m away from the front of the lens. Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame. 8) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 9) Measure on the monitor TV screen in which area of the optical axis frame the center of the Siemens star is located. Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The measurement value is named L1. 10) Read the correction data corresponding to the area from Table 5-1-10. 11) Input the correction data to each adjustment address. Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
12) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 13) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame. 14) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 15) Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The measurement value is named L2. 16) Compare the values L1 and L2, and confirm that L2 is smaller than L1. If L2 is lager than L1, input the data of Table 5-1-9 to each adjustment address.
Fig. 5-1-8.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
5-21
8. Picture Frame Setting Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) (1.5m from the front of the lens) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Video output terminal Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value
A=B, C=D, E=F
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF 4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF Setting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: F, address: 69, after noting down the data, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 3) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the specified position. 4) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display, and adjust the picture frame to this position in following adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.
Check on the oscilloscope 1. Horizontal period A=B
C=D
B
C
A
D
Processing after Completing Camera System Adjustments: After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data settings. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: F, address: 69, set the data noted down at step 2), and press the PAUSE button. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Fig. 5-1-9. 2. Vertical period E=F
E
F
V
Fig. 5-1-10. Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
Color bar chart picture frame
Fig. 5-1-11.
5-22
Monitor TV picture frame
9. Color Reproduction Adjustment Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color reproduction is produced. Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Video output terminal Vectorscope
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
F 35, 37, 3C, 3D
Specified Value
All color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame.
For NTSC model
Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5 PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF 4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: F, address: 8E, set data: 29, and press the PAUSE button. 3) Select page: F, address: C0, set the following data and press the PAUSE button. 37: NTSC model B7: PAL model 4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE button. 5) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color reproduction frame. 6) Change the data of page: F, address: 35, 37, 3C and 3D, and settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction frame.
Burst position
For PAL model Burst position
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data will not be written to the memory.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: F, address: 8E, set data: 2E, and press the PAUSE button. 2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Fig. 5-1-12.
5-23
10. MAX GAIN Adjustment Setting the minimum illumination. If it is not consistent, the image level required for taking subjects in low illuminance will not be produced (dark). Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
11. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K, and adjust the normal coefficient of the light value. Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
F 1D
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 6 6
96 97
00 27
Set the data. Set the data.
4
6
01
6F
5
6
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note)
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 96 00 Set the data. 2 6 97 00 Set the data. 01
00
4
0
01
00
F 1E, 1F, 30 to 33
Specified Value
0FF0 to 1010
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data
Processing after Completing Adjustments
6
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Note: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 1D
3
Display data of page 1 (Note4) Adjustment remote commander
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “ Color reproduction Adjustment”. Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX LV data
Adjusting method:
2 3
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
1 2
0 6
01 01
01 11
3
6
01
0D
4
6
02
5
F
10
6
1
2E
Procedure Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note5) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the display data (Note4) satisfies the specified value.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 1E, 1F, 30 to 33.
Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data Procedure
5-24
1
6
01
00
2
F
10
00
3 4
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Perform “Auto White Balance Adjustment”.
12. Auto White Balance Adjustment Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor. Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Filter Measurement Point
Filter C14 for color temperature correction Display data of page 1 (Note3)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander F
Adjustment Address Specified Value
40, 41 DCR-PC5(NTSC): R ratio: 2B00 to 2C00 B ratio: 5B00 to 5C00 DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL): R ratio: 2D00 to 2E00 B ratio: 5B00 to 5C00
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1
Note1: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Note2: Perform “Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input” before this adjustment. Note3: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
2
0
01
3 4
F F
42 42
5 6
F F
43 43
7 8
F F
9 10
01
Procedure Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens. Set the data. Write down the data. Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 2B: DCR-PC5 (NTSC) 2D: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
80
Write down the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
44 44
5B
Write down the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
F F
45 45
80
Write down the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
11
6
01
83
12
6
01
81
13
6
02
14
6
01
3F
15
6
04
04
Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note4) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
16
1
17
6
05
Check that the display data (Note3) satisfies the R ratio specified value. Set the data.
18
1
04
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the display data (Note3) satisfies the B ratio specified value.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 40, 41.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1
5-25
6
01
00
2
6
04
00
3
F
42
4
F
43
5
F
44
6
F
45
7
0
01
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Set the data that is written down at step 3, and press PAUSE button. Set the data that is written down at step 5, and press PAUSE button. Set the data that is written down at step 7, and press PAUSE button. Set the data that is written down at step 9, and press PAUSE button.
00
Set the data.
13. White Balance Check Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Filter
Measurement Point
Filter C14 for color temperature correction ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1 Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Specified Value
Vectorscope Fig. 5-1-13. A to B
Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data Procedure 1
6
01
00
2
F
10
00
3
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF Checking method: Order Page Address Data 1 2
6
01
0F
3
4
6
01
3F
7
R-Y
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Place the C14 filter on the lens. Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-13. B.
6
01
00
0 F
12
1
13
F
14
1
01 10
10
01 A9
A1
2mm
B-Y
2mm
Remove the C14 filter. Indoor white balance data check
9 10 11
Check that the lens is not covered with either filter. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-13. A. Outdoor white balance check
5 6
8
Procedure Indoor white balance check
Fig. 5-1-13. (A)
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Place the ND filter 1.5 (1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens.
0.5mm
R-Y
B-Y 3mm
0.5mm
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
3mm
Check that the display data (Note) satisfies the specified value. Specified value: 0000 to 0BC0 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Fig. 5-1-13. (B)
Check that the second digit of the display data (Note) is an odd number. Specified value: 1 : XX : XX Odd number
Note: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data
5-26
14. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment (DCR-PC5/PC5E) Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and compensate the exposure. Adjustment Page F 7 Adjustment Address
70 to 84
15. Steady Shot Check Precautions on the Parts Replacement There are two types of repair parts. Type A: ENC03LA Type B: ENC03LB Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and right during hand-shake correction operations. After replacing, perform the following procedure.
23 to 26
Input method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Input the following data to page: F, addresses: 70 to 84. Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
Address 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 3)
Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and operations will not be performed properly. Subject Arbitrary
Data C4 0E 75 0C 26 0B 35 0A 6E 09 A5 61 A1 79 64 81 82 84 B5 7B 20
Specified Value
1A00 to 2600
Switch setting: 1) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ...................................... ON 2) ZOOM .................................................................... TELE end Check method: Order Page Address Data
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
4)
Display data of page 1 (Note1) Adjustment remote commander
Note1: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data
Input the following data to page: 7, addresses: 23 to 26.
Address 23 24 25 26
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Data 7C 7F 7C 7B
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
04
11
Procedure Pitch sensor check (CF-75 board SE3450) Set the data.
1
6
2
1
3 4
6 1
04
12
5
0
01
01
6
F
10
E2
7
1
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Move the camcoder, and check that the display data (Note1) is changing.
8
F
10
E3
9
1
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Move the camcoder, and check that the display data (Note1) is changing.
Check that the display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value. (Note2) Yaw sensor check (CF-75 board SE3451) Set the data. Check that the display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value. (Note2) Steady shot check Set the data.
Note2: Don’t move the camcoder during data check.
Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data Procedure
5-27
1
F
10
00
2
0
01
00
3 4
6
04
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Set the data. Move the camcoder, and check that the steady shot operations have been performed normally
1-4.
1. VCO Adjustment (VC-245 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the EVF screen will be blurred. Mode Camera
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity. Note2: Set the switches as follows. Viewfinder ................................... ON (Viewfinder is Pulled out.) Note3: Perform the following data setting before the viewfinder system adjustments. 1) Select page: 2, address: 0E, and set data: 67. 2) Select page: 2, address: 0F, and set data: 01. Reset the data after completing adjustment. 1) Select page: 2, address: 0E, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 2, address: 0F, and set data: 00.
Signal Name LANC SIG EVF VCO
TCK TDO SWP GND
Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Arbitrary Pin 5 of CN004 (EVF VCO)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Frequency counter D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
92, 93 f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC) f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
Note1: NTSC: DCR-PC5 PAL: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
[Adjusting connector] Most of the measuring points for adjusting the viewfinder system are concentrated in CN004 of the VC-245 board. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-6 flexible jig (J6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN004. Pin No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
Subject Measurement Point
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2
Signal Name EVF VG GND
D
92
3
D
92
4
D
92
Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Read the data, and this data is named D92. Convert D92 to decimal notation, and obtain D92'. (Note2)
5
TMS TDI GND RF IN/LANC JACK IN RF MON
6
Calculate D93' using following equations (Decimal calculation) NTSC model: When D92' 226 D93' = D92' + 29 When D92' > 226 D93' = 255 PAL model: When D92' 29 D93' = D92' – 29 When D92' < 29 D93' = 00
7
Convert D93' to a hexadecimal number, and obtain D93. (Note2) Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Table 5-1-11.
CN004 2 1 20
19
8
D
93
D93
9
0
01
00
Set the data.
Note2: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
Remove the CPC lid Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)
Fig. 5-1-14.
5-28
3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-245 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode Camera
2. Bright Adjustment (VC-245 board) Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode Camera Subject Measurement Point
Arbitrary Pin 4 of CN004 (EVF VG)
Subject Measurement Point
Arbitrary Pin 4 of CN004 (EVF VG)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope D
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
95 A = 7.60 ± 0.05V
Adjustment Address Specified Value
99 A=2.45 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2
D
95
3
D
95
4
0
01
00
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the reversed waveform pedestal and nonreversed waveform pedestal to the specified value. Press PAUSE button.
2
D
99
3
D
99
Set the data.
4
0
01
Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the 3 steps peak and pedestal to the specified value. (The data should be “00” to “7F”.) Press PAUSE button. 00
Set the data.
Pedestal
A
3 steps peak
A
2H
2H
Pedestal
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-15.
Fig. 5-1-16.
5-29
4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-245 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the reproduction of the EVF screen may degenerate. Mode Camera Subject Measurement Point
Arbitrary Check on EVF screen
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
97, 98 The EVF screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel 2. Light induction plate 3. IC1802 Note2: Use the AC power adaptor.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2
D
97
80
3
D
98
80
4
D
98
5
D
97
6
D
97
7
D
98
8
D
98
9
D
98
10
0
01
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the EVF screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10. Change the data so that the EVF screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button. Change the data so that the EVF screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button.
00
If the EVF screen is colored, repeat steps 5 to 9. Set the data.
5-30
1-5.
1. VCO Adjustment (PD-126 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Mode VTR stop
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to avoid electrical shock. Note 2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity.
[Adjusting connector] Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are concentrated in CN2105 of the PD-126 board. The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN2105. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5
Signal Name VG COM GND PSIG HSY
Signal Measurement Point
No signal Pin 5 of CN2105 (HSY)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Frequency counter D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
A2, A3 f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC) f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
Note1: NTSC: DCR-PC5 PAL: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Table 5-1-12.
CN2105 5
1
2
D
A2
3
D
A2
4
D
A2
Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Read the data, and this data is named DA2. Convert DA2 to decimal notation, and obtain DA2'. (Note2)
5 PD-126 board
6
Calculate DA3' using following equations (Decimal calculation) NTSC model: When DA2' 221 DA3' = DA2' + 34 When DA2' > 221 DA3' = 255 PAL model: When DA2' 34 DA3' = DA2' – 34 When DA2' < 34 DA3' = 00
7
Convert DA3' to a hexadecimal number, and obtain DA3. (Note2) Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Fig. 5-1-17.
8
D
A3
DA3
9
0
01
00
Set the data.
Note2: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
5-31
2. Bright Adjustment (PD-126 board) Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode VTR stop
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-126 board) Set the dynamic range of the LCD driver to an appropriate level. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode VTR stop
Signal Measurement Point
No signal Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Signal Measurement Point
No signal Pin 4 of CN2105 (PSIG)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope D
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
A5 A = 7.8 ± 0.05V
Adjustment Address Specified Value
A6 A = 8.60 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2
D
A5
3
D
A5
4 5
0
01
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the reversed waveform pedestal and nonreversed waveform pedestal to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. 00
2 3
2 2
0E 0F
61
4
D
A6
5
D
A6
6 7
2 2
0E 0F
00 00
Set the data. Set the data.
8 9
0
01
00
Set the data. Check that the spacified value of “Bright Adjustment” is satisfied. If not, perform “Bright Adjustment”.
Change the data and set the PSIG signal amplitude (A) to the specified value. (The data should be “00” to “0F”.) Press PAUSE button.
Set the data. Perform “Black Limit Adjustment”.
Pedestal
Set the data. Set the following data. 5B: DCR-PC5 (NTSC) 53: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
A
A
V
2H Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-19.
Fig. 5-1-18.
5-32
4. Contrast Adjustment (PD-126 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode VTR stop Signal Measurement Point
No signal Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
AA A = 2.95 ± 0.05V
5. Center Level Adjustment (PD-126 board) Set the video signal center level of LCD panel to an appropriate level. Mode VTR stop Signal Measurement Point
No signal Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Digital voltmeter D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
AB A = 7.00 ± 0.05Vdc
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2
D
AA
3
D
AA
4 5
0
01
Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the 3 steps peak and pedestal to the specified value. (The data should be “00” to “7F”.) Press PAUSE button. 00
Set the data. Check that the specified value of “Bright Adjustment” is satisfied.
3 steps peak
A
2H Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-20.
5-33
2
3
0C
60
3
3
22
08
4
D
AB
5
D
AB
6
3
0C
00
7
3
22
00
8
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the DC voltage (A) to the specified value. (The data should be “00” to “7F”.) Press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
7. White Balance Adjustment (PD-126 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate. Mode VTR stop
6. V-COM Adjustment (PD-126 board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. Mode VTR stop Signal Measurement Point
No signal Check on LCD display
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
D
Adjustment Address Specified Value
A4 The brightness difference between the section A and section B is minimum.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. A4
3
D
A4
Change the data so that the brightness of the section A and that of the section B is equal. (The data should be “80” to “BF”.) Subtract 3 from the data.
4 5
D 0
A4 01
Press PAUSE button. Set the data.
00
B
A
A
B
B
A
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
D A8, A9 The LCD screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel 2. Light induction plate 3. IC2101 Note2: Use the AC power adaptor.
Adjusting method:
D
No signal Check on LCD screen
Adjustment Address Specified Value
Note: Perform “Bright Adjustment”, “Black Limit Adjustment”, “Contrast Adjustment” and “Center Level Adjustment” before this adjustment.
2
Signal Measurement Point
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2
D
A8
90
3
D
A9
6F
4
D
A9
5
D
A8
6
D
A8
7
D
A9
8
D
A9
9
D
A9
10
0
01
Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10. Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button. Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button.
A
B
Fig. 5-1-21.
5-34
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00
If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 5 to 9. Set the data.
5-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT On the mechanism section adjustment For details of mechanism section adjustments, checks, and replacement of mechanism parts, refer to the separate volume “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL J Mechanism ”.
2-1.
1) 2) 3) 4)
2-3.
1. Preparation for Adjustment 1) Clean the tape running side (tape guide, drum, capstan shaft, pinch roller, etc.). 2) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack. 3) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to the ON position. 4) Connect an oscilloscope to VC-245 board CN004 via the CPC6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J6082-371-A). Channel 1: VC-245 board, CN004 Pin w; (Note) External trigger: VC-245 board, CN004 Pin qj
HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT CASSETTE
Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack. Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to the ON position. Close the cassette compartment without the cassette. Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 0C, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. (The mechanism enters the record mode automatically.)
Note: Connect a 75 Ω resistor between pins w; of CN004 and ql (GND). 75 Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
5) 6) 7) 8)
Note: The function buttons become inoperable.
5)
To quit the record mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. (Whenever you want to quit the record mode, be sure to quit following this procedure.)
2-2.
1) 2) 3) 4)
HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT CASSETTE
Playback the alignment tape for tracking. (XH2-1) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 08. Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 31. Check that the oscilloscope RF waveform is normal at the entrance and exit. If not normal, adjust according to the separate volume “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL J Mechanism ” .
CN004 of VC-245 board Pin No. Signal Name 1 LANC SIG 3 5 EVF VCO 7 9 11 13 TCK 15 TDO 17 SWP 19 GND
Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack. Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to the ON position. Close the cassette compartment without the cassette. Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 0B, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. (The mechanism enters the playback mode automatically.) Note: The function buttons become inoperable.
5)
TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
To quit the playback mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. (Whenever you want to quit the playback mode, be sure to quit following this procedure.)
Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Signal Name EVF VG GND
TMS TDI GND RF IN/LANC JACK IN RF MON
2. Procedure after operations 1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack and set the HOLD switch to the ON position. 2) Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 00. 3) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 00. Entrance side
Check this section (Normal waveform)
CH1
CH2 (Trigger) 3.3msec
Fig. 5-2-1.
5-35
Exit side
5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS NTSC model : DCR-PC5 PAL model : DCR-PC4E/PC5E
3-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
Use the following measuring instruments for video section adjustments. 3-1-1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11)
12) 13) 14)
Equipment Required
TV monitor Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band above 30 MHz with delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10 : 1 probe.) Frequency counter Pattern generator with video output terminal. Digital voltmeter Audio generator Audio level meter Audio distortion meter Audio attenuator Regulated power supply Alignment tapes • Tracking standard (XH2-1) Parts code: 8-967-997-01 • SW/OL standard (XH2-3) Parts code: 8-967-997-11 • Audio operation check for NTSC (XH5-3) Parts code: 8-967-997-51 • System operation check for NTSC (XH5-5) Parts code: 8-967-997-61 • BIST check for NTSC (XH5-6) Parts code: 8-967-997-71 • Audio operation check for PAL (XH5-3P) Parts code: 8-967-997-55 • System operation check for PAL (XH5-5P) Parts code: 8-967-997-66 • BIST check for PAL (XH5-6P) Parts code: 8-967-997-76 Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B) CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) (Note) CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A)
Note: When using the old CPC-6 jig (J-6082-370-A), open the cabinet (R) assembly.
5-36
Note 1: Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode (VTR mode) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. The above procedure will enable the VTR power to be turned on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350)) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON mode”.
3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting 1) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the VTR mode or camera mode. To set to the VTR mode, set the power switch to “VCR” (or “PLAYER”) or set the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” using the adjustment remote commander (Note 1). To set to the Camera mode, set the power switch to “CAMERA” or set the “Forced Camera Power ON mode” using the adjustment remote commander (Note 2). After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced VTR Power ON Mode” or “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”. (Note 3) 2) To remove the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connectors. 1. VC-245 board CN005 (14P, 0.8mm) 2. VC-245 board CN006 (8P, 0.8mm) 3. VC-245 board CN003 (60P, 0.4mm) As the Battery terminal, AUDIO/VIDEO jack and LANC jack are provided on the BJ-1 board of the cabinet (R), the BJ-1 board must be connected to the VC-245 board. So remove the BJ-1 board from the cabinet (R). To remove The BJ-1 board from the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connector (The LCD block needs not to be connected.) BJ-1 board CN3104 (2P, 0.8mm) And connect the BJ-1 board to the following connector of VC245 board. VC-245 board CN003 (60P, 0.4mm) 3) The Lens block and EVF block need not to be connected. To remove them, disconnect the following connectors. 1. VC-245 board CN001 (88P, 0.4mm) 2. CF-75 board CN3353 (8P, 0.5mm) 4) As removing CN002 of VC-245 board (removing the control switch block (FK-30350)) means removing the lithium 3V power supply, data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the CN002 has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on history of use (total drum rotation time etc.) will be lost. Before removing, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2, address: B0 to C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to AA). (Refer to “5-4.Service Mode” for the data on the history use and the self-diagnosis data.) 5) If the “Forced VTR power ON” mode is set, the cabinet (L) (power switch, control switch block (FK-30350), and speaker) need not be connected. To remove the cabinet (L), disconnect the following connectors. VC-245 board CN002 (39P, 0.3mm)
Note 2: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode (Camera mode) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350)) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON mode”. Note 3: Setting the “Forced Memory Power ON” mode (Memory mode) (DCR-PC5/PC5E) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 05, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. The above procedure will enable the memory power to be turned on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350)) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON mode”. Note 4: Exiting the “Forced Power ON” mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-37
3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors Some of the adjusting points of the video section are concentrated at VC-245 board CN004. Connect the measuring instruments via the CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A). The following table lists the pin numbers and signal names of CN004. Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name 1 2 LANC SIG 3 4 EVF VG 5 EVF VCO 6 GND 7 8 9 10 11 12 TMS 13 14 TCK TDI 15 TDO 16 GND 17 18 SWP RF IN/LANC JACK IN 19 20 GND RF MON
CN004 2 1 20
19
Remove the CPC lid Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)
Fig. 5-3-1
Table 5-3-1.
3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-2, and perform the adjustments. TV monitor VIDEO (Yellow) Main unit AUDIO L (White)
Adjustment remote commander
AUDIO R (Red) LANC jack
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Fig. 5-3-2.
5-38
3-1-5. Alignment Tapes Use the alignment tapes shown in the following table. Use tapes specified in the signal column of each adjustment. Name Tracking standard (XH2-1) SW/OL standard (XH2-3) Audio operation check (XH5-3 (NTSC), XH5-3P (PAL)) System operation check (XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL)) BIST check (XH5-6 (NTSC), XH5-6P (PAL))
Use Tape path adjustment Switching position adjustment Audio system adjustment Operation check BIST check
Fig. 5-3-3 shows the 75% color bar signals recorded on the alignment tape for Audio Operation Check. Note: Measure with video terminal (Terminated at 75 Ω)
Y
ello White
(75%)
1V
Blue
Green w Magenta Cy Red
Burst signal
0.714V
an
White (75%)
Y
White (100%)
ello
an Green Magenta w Red Blue Cy
For NTSC model
0.286V 0.286V
Q
Q
I
I
Black
White (100%)
Horizontal sync signal Color bar signal waveform
Color bar pattern
Y
ello
Blac
Blue
Red Cy
0.3V
Magenta w
White
an k
0.7V
1V
Green
Y
White (100%)
ello
Magenta w Red Blue Cy
an Green
For PAL model
(100%)
0.3V Burst signal
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform
Color bar pattern
Fig. 5-3-3. Color bar signal of alignment tapes 3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance Video input/output Special stereo mini jack Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced, sync negative S video input/output 4-pin mini DIN Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced, sync negative Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (NTSC) : 0.300 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (PAL)
Audio input/output Special stereo mini jack Input level: 327mV Input impedance: More than 47kΩ Output level: 327 mV (at load impedance 47 kΩ) Output impedance: Below 2.2 kΩ
5-39
3-2.
2-2. Serial No. Input Write the serial No. and model code in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to hexadecimal, and write in the EEPROM. Page C
SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. Initialization of B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data If the B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data is erased due to some reason, perform “1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA”, of “5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT”
Address
2. Serial No. Input 2-1. Company ID Input Write the company ID in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Page C Address
Input method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Read the serial No. on the name plate, and take it as D1. Example: If the serial No. is 77881. D1=77881 3) Obtain D2 and H1 corresponding to D1 from Table 5-3-2. Example: If D1 is “77881”. D2=D1–65536=12345 H1=FE H1 (Hexadecimal) D1 (Decimal) D2 (Decimal) (Service model code) 000001 to 065535 D1 FE 065536 to 131071 D1–65536 FE 131072 to 196607 D1–131072 FE
E8, E9, EA, EB, EC
Input method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Input the following data to page: C, addresses: E8 to EC. Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
Address E8 E9 EA EB EC 3)
ED, EE, EF
Data 08 00 46 01 01
Table 5-3-2. 4)
Input H1 to page: C, address: ED. (Model code input) Example: If H1 is “FE”. Select page: C, address: ED, set data: FE, and press the PAUSE button. 5) Obtain the maximum decimal not exceeding D2 from Table 53-3, and take this as D3. Example: If D2 is “12345”. D3=12288 6) Obtain the hexadecimal corresponding to D3 from Table 5-3-3, and take this as H3. Example: If D3 is “12288”. H3=3000 7) Obtain the difference D4 between D 2 and D 3. (Decimal calculation, 0 D4 255) D4= D2–D3 Example: If D2 is “12345” and D3 is “12288”. D4=12345–12288=57 8) Convert D4 to hexadecimal, and take this as H4. (Refer to “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” in “5-4. Service Mode”.) Example: If D4 is “57”. H4=39 9) Input the upper 2 digits of H3 to page: C, address: EE. Example: If H3 is “3000”. Select page: C, address: EE, set data: 30, and press the PAUSE button. 10) Input H4 to page: C, address: EF. Example: If H4 is “39”. Select page: C, address: EF, set data: 39, and press the PAUSE button. 11) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-40
HexaHexaHexaHexaHexaHexaHexaHexaDecimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal (D3) (D3) (D3) (D3) (D3) (D3) (D3) (D3) (H3) (H3) (H3) (H3) (H3) (H3) (H3) (H3)
0 256 512 768 1024 1280 1536 1792 2048 2304 2560 2816 3072 3328 3584 3840 4096 4352 4608 4864 5120 5376 5632 5888 6144 6400 6656 6912 7168 7424 7680 7936
0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 0A00 0B00 0C00 0D00 0E00 0F00 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 1A00 1B00 1C00 1D00 1E00 1F00
8192 8448 8704 8960 9216 9472 9728 9984 10240 10496 10752 11008 11264 11520 11776 12032 12288 12544 12800 13056 13312 13568 13824 14080 14336 14592 14848 15104 15360 15616 15872 16128
2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 2A00 2B00 2C00 2D00 2E00 2F00 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 3A00 3B00 3C00 3D00 3E00 3F00
16384 16640 16896 17152 17408 17664 17920 18176 18432 18688 18944 19200 19456 19712 19968 20224 20480 20736 20992 21248 21504 21760 22016 22272 22528 22784 23040 23296 23552 23808 24064 24320
4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 4A00 4B00 4C00 4D00 4E00 4F00 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 5A00 5B00 5C00 5D00 5E00 5F00
24576 24832 25088 25344 25600 25856 26112 26368 26624 26880 27136 27392 27648 27904 28160 28416 28672 28928 29184 29440 29696 29952 30208 30464 30720 30976 31232 31488 31744 32000 32256 32512
6000 6100 6200 6300 6400 6500 6600 6700 6800 6900 6A00 6B00 6C00 6D00 6E00 6F00 7000 7100 7200 7300 7400 7500 7600 7700 7800 7900 7A00 7B00 7C00 7D00 7E00 7F00
32768 33024 33280 33536 33792 34048 34304 34560 34816 35072 35328 35584 35840 36096 36352 36608 36864 37120 37376 37632 37888 38144 38400 38656 38912 39168 39424 39680 39936 40192 40448 40704
Table 5-3-3.
5-41
8000 8100 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 8700 8800 8900 8A00 8B00 8C00 8D00 8E00 8F00 9000 9100 9200 9300 9400 9500 9600 9700 9800 9900 9A00 9B00 9C00 9D00 9E00 9F00
40960 A000 49152 41216 A100 49408 41472 A200 49664 41728 A300 49920 41984 A400 50176 42240 A500 50432 42496 A600 50688 42752 A700 50944 43008 A800 51200 43264 A900 51456 43520 AA00 51712 43776 AB00 51968 44032 AC00 52224 44288 AD00 52480 44544 AE00 52736 44800 AF00 52992 45056 B000 53248 45312 B100 53504 45568 B200 53760 45824 B300 54016 46080 B400 54272 46336 B500 54528 46592 B600 54784 46848 B700 55040 47104 B800 55296 47360 B900 55552 47616 BA00 55808 47872 BB00 56064 48128 BC00 56320 48384 BD00 56576 48640 BE00 56832 48896 BF00 57088
C000 C100 C200 C300 C400 C500 C600 C700 C800 C900 CA00 CB00 CC00 CD00 CE00 CF00 D000 D100 D200 D300 D400 D500 D600 D700 D800 D900 DA00 DB00 DC00 DD00 DE00 DF00
57344 57600 57856 58112 58368 58624 58880 59136 59392 59648 59904 60160 60416 60672 60928 61184 61440 61696 61952 62208 62464 62720 62976 63232 63488 63744 64000 64256 64512 64768 65024 65280
E000 E100 E200 E300 E400 E500 E600 E700 E800 E900 EA00 EB00 EC00 ED00 EE00 EF00 F000 F100 F200 F300 F400 F500 F600 F700 F800 F900 FA00 FB00 FC00 FD00 FE00 FF00
3. Touch Panel Adjustment (VC-245 board) Adjust the calibration of the touch panel. Mode VTR stop Signal Adjustment Page
Arbitrary D
Adjustment Address
E0 to E3
4. Battery End Check (VC-245 board) Check the battery end voltage. Mode Camera recording and VTR playback Subject
Arbitrary
Note: It is normal though the following symptoms appear during the battery end check. 1) The message of “FOR InfoLITHIUM BATTERY ONLY” on the LCD or viewfinder screen. 2) The tally lamp is flashing.
Note 1: Protect the Touch panel (LCD screen) with a transparent sheet. Note 2: Turn off the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander.
Adjusting method: 1) While pressing the DISPLAY button, set the POWER switch from OFF to VCR (or PLAYER). 2) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in the part A. 3) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in the part B. 4) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in the part C.
Connection: 1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-3-5. Checking method: 1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that the digital voltmeter display is 3.5 ± 0.1Vdc. 2) Turn off the power supply. 3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander. 4) Turn on the power supply. 5) Load a cassette, and set to the camera recording mode. 6) Decrease the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that the digital voltmeter display is 3.3 ± 0.1Vdc. 7) Record the camera signal for a minute. 8) Playback the recorded section and check that the playback picture and sound are normal.
A C
B
Regulated power supply +
+
Fig. 5-3-4.
3.3 ± 0.01 Vdc
+ Digital volt meter
Fig. 5-3-5.
5-42
3-3.
2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that the specified value of “36 MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied. Adjusting Procedure: 1. Cap FG duty adjustment 2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 adjustment 3. Switching position adjustment 4. AGC center level 5. APC & AEQ adjustment
Mode
VTR stop
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Display data of page: 3, address: 03 Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
C 1F, 20, 22, 29
Specified Value
Bit2, bit3, bit4 and bit6 are “0”
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data
1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Set the Cap FG signal duty cycle to 50% to establish an appropriate capstan servo. If deviated, the uneven rotation of capstan and noise can occur. Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03
1 2
0 3
01 01
3
3
02
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander C
4
3
03
Adjustment Address Specified Value
16 00
5
0
01
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Close the cassette compartment without inserting a cassette. 0 3
01 01
01 1B
4
3
02
Check that the data changes in the following order. “1B” → “2B” → “00”
5
3
03
6
0
01
Check that the data is “00”. (Note) Set the data.
00
Procedure Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “00”. Check that bit2, bit3, bit4 and bit6 are “0”. (Note)
00
Set the data.
Note: If bit2, bit3, bit4 or bit6 of the data is “1”, there are errors. For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”.)
Adjusting method:
2 3
01 30
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Note: If the data is “01”, adjustment has errors or the mechanism deck is defective.
5-43
Bit value of page: 3,
Error contents
address: 03 data bit 4 = 1
PLL f0 is defective
bit 6 = 1 bit 3 = 1 bit 2 = 1
LPF f0 is defective PLL f0 final adjustment is defective PLL f0 final adjustment time-out
4. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment
3. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Mode
VTR playback
Signal Measurement Point
SW/OL reference tape (XH2-3) Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander C
Adjustment Address Specified Value
10, 11, 12, 13 00
4-1. Preparations before adjustments Mode Camera recording Subject
Arbitrary
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2
2
30
40
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Insert the SW/OL reference tape and enter the VTR STOP mode. 2 3
0 3
01 21
01
4
3
01
0D
5
3
02
6
3
03
7
0
01
00
4-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Set the data. Check that the data is “02”. (Note1) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to “00”. Check that the data is “00”. (Note2) Set the data.
Mode Signal
Playback Recorded signal at “Preparations before adjustments”
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Pin w; of CN004 (RF MON) (Note 1) Ext. trigger: Pin qj of CN004 (SWP) Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
C 1E
Specified Value
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”
Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pin w; and Pin ql (GND) of CN004. 75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Note1: If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “72”, the tape top being played. After playing the tape for 1 to 2 seconds, stop it, perform step 4 and higher. Note2: If bit 0 of the data is “1”, the even channel is defective. If bit 1 is “1”, the odd channel is defective. Contents of the defect is written into page: C, addresses: 10 and 12. See the following table. (For the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”.)
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Playback the recorded signal at “Preparations before adjustments” 2 3
When the even channel is defective Data of page: C, Contents of defect
0 3
01 33
01 08
4
address: 10 EE
Writing into EEPROM (IC502) is defective
E8 E7
Adjustment data is out of range No data is returned from IC301 (CAIN)
When the odd channel is defective Data of page: C, address: 12
Contents of defect
EE E8
Writing into EEPROM (IC502) is defective Adjustment data is out of range
E7
No data is returned from IC301 (CAIN)
Procedure Set the data. Record the camera signal for three minutes.
5
3
01
6 7
3 3
02 03
8
23
Set the data. Set the data. Confirm that the playback RF signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-5.) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is “00”. Check that the data is “00”. (Note2) Perform “APC & AEQ Adjustment”.
Note2: If the data of page: 3, address: 03 is other than “00”, adjustment has errors. (Take an appropriate remedial measures according to the errors referring to the following table.)
PB RF signal is stable
Pin w;
Data
Contents of defect
20 30
Perform re-adjustment. (Note 3) The machine is defective
40 50
Perform re-adjustment. (Note 3) The machine is defective
Note 3: If this data is displayed twice successively, the machine is defective.
Pin qj 6.7 msec
Fig. 5-3-5.
5-44
4-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Mode
Playback
Signal
Recorded signal at “Preparations before adjustments” Pin w; of CN004 (RF MON) (Note 1) Ext. trigger: Pin qj of CN004 (SWP)
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope C
Adjustment Address Specified Value
18, 19, 1B, 1C, 21, 2C The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”
4-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data
Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pin w; and Pin ql (GND) of CN004. 75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11) Note 2: The “AGC Center Level Adjustment” must have already been completed before starting this adjustment.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Playback the recorded signal at “Preparations before adjustments” 2 3
0 3
01 33
01 08
4 5
3
01
6
3
02
7
3
03
8
07
Set the data. Set the data. Confirm that the playback RF signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-6.) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes from “07” to “00” in about 20 seconds after pressing PAUSE button. Check that the data is “00”. (Note3) Perform “Processing after Completing Adjustments”.
Note3: If the data is other than “00”, adjustment has errors. Take an appropriate remedial measures according to the errors referring to the following table.
Data 20
Contents of defect Perform re-adjustment. (Note 4)
30 50
The machine is defective Perform re-adjustment. (Note 4)
60 80
The machine is defective The machine is defective
Note 4: If this data is displayed twice successively, the machine is defective.
PB RF signal is stable
Pin w;
Pin qj 6.7 msec
Fig. 5-3-6.
5-45
Procedure
1 2
2 3
30 33
00 00
Set the data. Set the data.
3
0
01
00
Set the data.
3-4.
2. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the video system adjustments, check that the specified value of “36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied. 3-4-1. Base Band Block Adjustments 1. Chroma BPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Set the center frequency of IC1301 chroma band-pass filter. Mode Camera Subject Measurement Point
All black (Cover the lens with the lens cap) CH1: Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated) CH2: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope C
Adjustment Address Specified Value
28 A = 100mVp-p or less B = 200mVp-p or more
3
0C
4
C
28
5 6
C 3
28 0C
04
00
7 8
0
01
00
Arbitrary Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope C
Adjustment Address Specified Value
25 A = 1000 ± 14mV
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
3
Camera
Subject Measurement Point
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
2
Mode
Check that the burst signal (B) is output to the chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO jack. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Change the data for minimum amplitude of the burst signal level (A). (The data should be “00” to “07”.)
2 3
2 2
35 35
01
4
3
0C
02
5
C
25
6 7
C 3
25 0C
8
2
35
9
0
01
00
00
Note down the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the Y signal level (A) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data that is noted down at step 2. Set the data.
Center of luminance line
A
Press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the burst signal level (B) satisfies the specified value. Set the data.
H
Fig. 5-3-8.
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 04: A CH1
CH2
H
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 00:
CH1
B
H
Fig. 5-3-7.
5-46
4. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-245 Board)
3. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Mode
Camera
Subject Measurement Point
Arbitrary Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated) External trigger: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope C
Adjustment Address Specified Value
26, 27 Cr level:
2 2
35 35
01
4
3
0C
02
5
C
26
C
26 27
8
C
27
3
0C
11
2
35
12
0
01
Oscilloscope Sync level: A = 286 ± 18mV(NTSC) A = 300 ± 18mV(PAL) Burst level: B = 286 ± 18mV(NTSC) B = 300 ± 18mV(PAL)
2 3
2 3
35 0C
01 02
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the Cr signal level (A) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button.
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the sync signal level (A) satisfies the specified value. Check that the burst signal level (B) satisfies the specified value.
5
Note down the data. Set the data.
6
3
0C
7
2
35
8
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data that is noted down at step 1.
00
Set the data.
Change the data and set the Cb signal level (B) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button.
9 10
Measuring Instrument Specified Value
4
2 3
C
Arbitrary VIDEO terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated)
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 35 Note down the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
7
Camera
Subject Measurement Point
Adjusting method:
A = 714 ± 14mV(NTSC) A = 700 ± 14mV(PAL) Cb level: B = 714 ± 14mV(NTSC) B = 700 ± 14mV(PAL) Burst level: C = 286 ± 6mV(NTSC) C = 300 ± 6mV(PAL)
Adjusting method:
6
Mode
Check that the burst signal level (C) is satisfied the specified value. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00
B A H
Set the data that is noted down at step 2. Set the data.
00
Fig. 5-3-10.
H
C
A
0.28 µsec (NTSC) 0.23 µsec (PAL)
B
0.28 µsec (NTSC) 0.23 µsec (PAL)
Fig. 5-3-9.
5-47
1-3. IC301 AUD (ABUS) PB BIST Check Order Page Address Data Procedure
3-4-2. BIST Check Switch setting: LCD panel ...................................................................... Open
1
3
11
04
1. Playback System Check
2
3
12
08
3
3
12
00
Set the POWER switch to VCR or PLAYER position. Connect the adjustment remote commander and set the HOLD switch to ON (SERVICE) position.
4
3
13
03
5
3
14
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
6
3
15
7
3
1-1. Preparations for Playback Order Page Address Data 1 2
3 4
0 C
01 42
5
01 00
Procedure
Playback the BIST check tape. (XH5-6 (NTSC), XH5-6P (PAL)) Press DISPLAY button and erase the indicators on the LCD screen.
6
Note1: Perform the following checks in the playback mode. Note2: Use the AC power adaptor or the battery (Info LITHIUM S series).
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 3 70 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 3 70 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 3
4
3
5
3
73
74
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 41 PAL model: 2D Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 81 PAL model: 7C If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 AUD (ABUS) playback system is normal.
1-4. IC301 VFD PB BIST Check • EX Y BIST Check Order Page Address Data
1-2. IC301 TRX (RF) PB BIST Check
3
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data is equal to either of the following values. And memorize the case number of the value. NTSC model: 63 (Case1), C5 (Case2), 75 (Case3), D3 (Case4), 59 (Case5), FF (Case6) PAL model: 86 (Case1), AA (Case2), 90 (Case3) Check that the data is equal to the following value which case number is equal to that of address 73. NTSC model: 84 (Case1), 55 (Case2), 07 (Case3), D6 (Case4), 01 (Case5), D0 (Case6) PAL model: 35 (Case1), 33 (Case2), B6 (Case3) If the data of address 73 and address 74 are correct, IC301 TRX (RF) playback system is normal.
5-48
1
3
12
10
2
3
12
00
3
3
13
04
4
3
14
5
3
15
6
3
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: FB PAL model: 54 Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: F4 PAL model: ED If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 EX Y playback system is normal.
• EVF Y BIST Check Order Page Address Data 1
3
10
88
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
• EVF Cr BIST Check Order Page Address Data 1
3
10
89
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
• EVF Cb BIST Check Order Page Address Data
Procedure Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
1
3
10
8A
2
3
12
10
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 9B PAL model: 20 Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: C3 PAL model: F8
5
3
14
6
3
15
If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 EVF Y playback system is normal.
7
3
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 EVF Cb playback system is normal.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
1
3
10
98
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 2E PAL model: 33
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 34 PAL model: DD If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 EVF Cr playback system is normal.
6
3
15
7
3
5-49
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: A9 PAL model: AA Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 39 PAL model: 03
• PANEL Y BIST Check Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 9B PAL model: 20 Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: C3 PAL model: F8 If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 PANEL Y playback system is normal.
• PANEL Cr BIST Check Order Page Address Data 1
3
10
99
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
7
3
15
3
3
10
9A
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
6
7
3
3
1 2
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
14
15
0 8
01 21
01 0F
Procedure
Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
• ENCODER Ya BIST Check Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 3 10 8B Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 PANEL Cr playback system is normal.
1
3
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 2E PAL model: 33 Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 34 PAL model: DD
• PANEL Cb BIST Check Order Page Address Data
5
1-5. IC301 ENCODER BIST Check • Preparations Order Page Address Data
Procedure
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
• ENCODER Yb BIST Check Order Page Address Data
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: A9 PAL model: AA Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 39 PAL model: 03 If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 PANEL Cb playback system is normal.
5-50
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: FD PAL model: 58 Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 3E PAL model: BE If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 ENCORDER Ya playback system is normal.
Procedure Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
1
3
10
8C
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
Procedure Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: 94 PAL model: A1 Check that the data is the following value. NTSC model: D6 PAL model: ED If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 ENCORDER Yb playback system is normal.
• ENCODER Ca BIST Check Order Page Address Data 1
3
10
8D
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
6
3
7
3
14
1-6. Processing after Completing Playback System Check
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Order Page Address Data
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is equal to either of the following values. And memorize the case number of the value. NTSC model: 11 (Case1), 4E (Case2) PAL model: E8 (Case1), 7B (Case2) Check that the data is equal to the following value which case number is equal to that of address 14. NTSC model: FD (Case1), 3B (Case2) PAL model: 62 (Case1), B0 (Case2)
15
• ENCODER Cb BIST Check Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 3 10 8E Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
0 C
01 42
01
Set the data. Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 00: DCR-PC4E 28: DCR-PC5/PC5E
3
8
21
03
4
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
5
If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 ENCODER Ca playback system is normal.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is equal to either of the following values. And memorize the case number of the value. NTSC model: 5C (Case1), BC (Case2) PAL model: 96 (Case1), 35 (Case2) Check that the data is equal to the following value which case number is equal to that of address 14. NTSC model: 20 (Case1), A8 (Case2) PAL model: 79 (Case1), 7C (Case2) If the data of address 14 and address 15 are correct, IC301 ENCODER Cb playback system is normal.
5-51
Procedure
1 2
Turn off the power and turn on again.
2. Recording System Check 2-3. Processing after Completing Recording System Check
2-1. Preparations for recording Order Page Address Data 1 2
3
10
C0
3
3
11
07
4 5
Order Page Address Data
Playback the BIST check tape. (XH5-6(NTSC), XH5-6P(PAL)) Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
1 2
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Enter the stop mode. While keep the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander at ON (SERVICE) position, eject the BIST check tape. Close the cassette compartment without inserting a cassette.
6 7 8
Procedure
3
01
0C
Set the power switch to “CAMERA”. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
2-2. IC301 TRX (RF) REC BIST Check Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 3 70 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2
3
70
3
3
71
4
3
72
5
3
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data is equal to either of the following values. And memorize the case number of the value. NTSC model: 26 (Case1), 5E (Case2) PAL model: 53 (Case1), 77 (Case2) Check that the data is equal to the following value which case number is equal to that of address 71. NTSC model: 95 (Case1), E3 (Case2) PAL model: DF (Case1), D5 (Case2) If the data of address 71 and address 72 are correct, IC301 TRX (RF) recording system is normal.
5-52
3
01
00
Procedure Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Turn off the power and turn on again.
3-5.
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
[Connection of Audio System Measuring Devices] Connect the audio system measuring devices as shown in Fig. 5-3-11. Main unit
Recording (Camera mode)
Audio oscillator
600 Ω
MIC
Left
Right
Attenuator
600 Ω: 270 Ω (1-249-410-11) + 330 Ω (1-249-411-11)
Playback Main unit
TV monitor Video (Yellow) Left (White)
AUDIO/ VIDEO OUT
47k Ω
Audio level meter or Distortion meter
Right (Red)
47k Ω 47k Ω (1-249-437-11)
Fig. 5-3-11.
5-53
1. Playback Level Check Mode VTR playback Signal
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value
4. Overall Noise Level Check Mode Camera recording and playback
Alignment tape: For audio operation check (XH5-3 (NTSC)) (XH5-3P (PAL)) Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO VIDEO jack
Signal Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value
Audio level meter and frequency counter 32 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs 48 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs 44.1 kHz mode: The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP OFF is +2.0 ± 2.0dBs. The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP ON is –6 ± 2 dB from the signal level during EMP OFF.
5. Overall Separation Check Mode Signal
Camera recording and playback 400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack [left] (Connect the MIC jack [right] to GND)
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Audio [right] terminal of AUDIO VIDEO jack Audio level meter
Specified Value
Below –40dBs (IHF-A filter ON)
2. Overall Level Characteristics Check Camera recording and playback 400Hz, –66 dBs signal: MIC jack left and right
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument
Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO VIDEO jack Audio level meter
Specified Value
–7.5 ± 3.0dBs
< > : Left channel check [ ] : Right channel check Checking Method: 1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the [left] terminal of the MIC jack only. 2) Record in the camera mode. 3) Playback the recorded section. 4) Check that the signal level of the audio [right] terminal is the specified value.
Checking Method: 1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack. 2) Record in the camera mode. 3) Playback the recorded section. 4) Check that the 400Hz signal level is the specified value. 3. Overall Distortion Check Mode Signal
Camera recording and playback 400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack left and right
Measurement Point
Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO VIDEO jack Audio distortion meter
Measuring Instrument Specified Value
Audio level meter Below –45dBs (IHF-A filter ON, 20kHz LPF ON)
Checking Method: 1) Insert a shorting plug in the MIC jack. 2) Record in the camera mode. 3) Playback the recorded section. 4) Check that the noise level is the specified value.
Checking Method: 1) Check that the playback signal level is the specified value.
Mode Signal
No signal: Insert a shorting plug in the MIC jack Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO VIDEO jack
Below 0.4% (200Hz to 6kHz BPF ON)
Checking Method: 1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack. 2) Record in the camera mode. 3) Playback the recorded section. 4) Check that the distortion is the specified value.
5-54
5-4. SERVICE MODE 4-1.
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
2. Precautions upon using the adjustment remote commander Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional communication with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-volatile memory. 1. Using the adjustment remote commander 1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC terminal. 2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to “HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-4-1.
Page
Data
Address
Fig. 5-4-1 3)
Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows. • Changing the page The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F notation LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F Decimal notation conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15
4)
• Changing the address The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF. • Changing the data (Data setting) The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF. • Writing the adjustment data The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment data (B, C, D, F, 7, 8 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is not performed.) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power supply once.
5-55
4-2.
DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal conversion table. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table Lower digit of hexadecimal
0
1
2
3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
A (A)
B (b)
C (c)
D (d)
E (E)
F (F)
Upper digit of hexadecimal
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
2
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
4
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
77
76
77
78
79
5
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
6
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
7
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
8
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
9
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
A (A)
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
B (b)
176
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
C (c)
177 193
178
192
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
D (d)
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
E (E)
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
F (F)
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander. (Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd); Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point “189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 5-4-1.
5-56
4-3.
SERVICE MODE 2-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code) Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in addresses F4, F8 and FC. The type of error indicated by the code are shown in the following table.
1. Setting the Test Mode Page D Address 10 Data Function 00 Normal 01 Forced camera power ON 02 Forced VTR power ON 03 Forced camera + VTR power ON 05 Forced memory power ON • Before setting the data , select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. • For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be exited even when the main power is turned off. • After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data of this address to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Code 00 10 11 22 23 24 30 40 42
2. Emergence Memory Address Page C Address F4 to FF Address Contents F4 EMG code when first error occurs Upper: MSW code when shift starts when first error occurs F6 Lower: MSW code when first error occurs Lower: MSW code to be moved when first error F7 occurs F8 EMG code when second error occurs Upper: MSW code when shift starts when second FA error occurs Lower: MSW code when second error occurs Lower: MSW code to be moved when second error FB occurs FC EMG code when last error occurs Upper: MSW code when shift starts when last error occurs FE Lower: MSW code when last error occurs Lower: MSW code to be moved when last error FF occurs When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in the above addresses (F4 to FF). when first error occurs in the unit, the data corresponding to the error is written in the first emergency address (F4 to F7). In the same way, when the second error occurs, the data corresponding to the error is written in the second emergency address (F8 to FB). Finally, when the last error occurs, the data corresponding to the error is written in the last emergency address (FC to FF). Note: After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of addresses F4 to FF to “00”.
Initializing method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 37, and press the PAUSE button. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-57
Emergency Type No error Loading motor emergency during loading Loading motor emergency during unloading T reel emergency during normal rotation S reel emergency during normal rotation T reel emergency (Short circuit between S reel terminal and T reel terminal) FG emergency at the start up of the capstan FG emergency at the start up of the drum FG emergency during normal rotation of the drum
2-2. MSW Code MSW when errors occur: Information on MSW (mode SW) when errors occur MSW when movement starts: Information on MSW when movements starts when the mechanism position is moved (When the L motor is moved) MSW of target of movement: Information on target MSW of movement when the mechanism position is moved
Mechanical Position ← UNLOAD BL
EJ
LOAD → ULE
BL
SR
BL
GL
BL
STOP
BL
R/P
1 1 0 = 6
1 1 1 = 7 0 1 0 = 2
1 1 1 = 7 0 1 1 = 3
1 1 1 = 7 0 0 1 = 1
1 1 1 = 7 1 0 1 = 5
1 1 1 = 7
1 0 0 = 4
← C (MSB) ←B ← A (LSB)
LS chassis movement section
Lock released Cassette compartment
Pinch roller pressing
Position
Code
EJ
4
BL
7
ULE
5
SR GL
1 3
STOP
2
R/P
6
NULL
0
Contents Position at which the cassette component lock is released, at the farthest unload side mechanically at which the mechanism can move no further in the UNLOAD direction. BLANK code, at the boundary between codes. EJECT completion position. when the cassette is ejected, the mechanism will stop at this position. Cassette IN standby. The guide will start protruding out as the mechanism moves towards the LOAD position. Position at which it is possible to release the S ratchet. Guide loading are performed here. Stop position in the loading state. The pinch roller separates, the tension regulator returns, and the brake is imposed on both reels. PB, REC, CUE, REVIEW, PAUSE positions. When pinch roller is pressed, and the tension regulator is ON, the mechanism is operating at this position in modes in which normal images are shown. Code not existing in the MD. Default value.
5-58
3. Bit value discrimination Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”. Display on the adjustment remote commander
Address Page
bit3 to bit0 discrimination bit7 to bit4 discrimination
Display on the adjustment remote commander 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A 9 A (A) B (b) C (c) D (d) E (E) B F (F )
bit3 or bit7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit values bit2 bit1 or or bit6 bit5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
bit0 or bit4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.
4. Switch check (1) Page 2 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Address 43 Function When bit value=1 VTR MODE SW (Control switch block) OFF CAM STBY SW (Control switch block) OFF START/STOP SW (Control switch block) OFF EJECT SW (Control switch block) OFF CC DOWN SW (Mechanism chassis) OFF (UP) PHOTO FREEZE SW (FK-30350 block S4004) OFF PHOTO STBY SW (Control switch block) OFF
When bit value=0 ON ON ON ON ON (DOWN) ON ON
Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 43. 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
5-59
5. Switch check (2) Page 2
Address 60 to 63
Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 63. 2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Address 60 (KEY AD0) (IC1104 od) 61 (KEY AD1) (IC1104 of) 62 (KEY AD2) (IC1104 og) 63 (KEY AD3) (IC1104 oh)
Data 00 (00 to 0A) 19 (0B to 24) 32 (25 to 44) 59 (45 to 6E) 85 (6F to 9F) B8 (A0 to D4) EE (D5 to FF) FOCUS FOCUS PHOTO SUPER (INFINITY) (AUTO/MANUAL) (PHOTO REC) NIGHT SHOT No key input (FK-30350)(S4007) (FK-30350)(S4008) (FK-30350)(S4005) (FK-30350)(S4003) DISPLAY BACK LIGHT EVF OFF EVF ON (FK-30350) (FK-30350) (CF-75) (CF-75) (S4011) (S4010) (S2201) (S2201) PANEL PANEL REVERSE NORMAL (PR-34)(S3601) (PR-34)(S3601) PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN (PO-5) (PO-5) (S3501) (S3501)
6. Record of Use check Note: When replacing the drum assembly, initialize the data of address: A2 to A4.
Page 2
Address A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA
Address A2 to AA
Function Drum rotation counted time (BCD code)
User initial power on date (BCD code)
Final condensation occurrence date (BCD code)
Remarks Minutes Hour (L) Hour (H) Year Month Day Year Month Day
10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit) 1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit) After setting the clock, set the date of power on next.
Using method: 1) The record of use data is displayed at page: 2, addresses: A2 to AA. Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the control switch block (FK-30350) is removed.
Initializing method: 1) Using the adjustment remote commander, select the object address and set data: 00.
5-60
7. Record of Self-diagnosis check Page 2 Address B0 to C6 Address B0
Self-diagnosis code “Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1 B2
“Block function” code (Occurred 1st time) “Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
B4 B5
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1 “Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6 B8
“Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time) “Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B9 BA
“Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time) “Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BC BD
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 4th time) *1 “Block function” code (Occurred 4th time)
BE C0
“Detailed” code (Occurred 4th time) “Repaired by” code (Occurred 5th time) *1
C1 C2
“Block function” code (Occurred 5th time) “Detailed” code (Occurred 5th time)
C4 C5
“Repaired by” code (Occurred the last time) *1 “Block function” code (Occurred the last time)
C6
“Detailed” code (Occurred the last time) *1 : “01” → “C”, “03” → “E”
Using method: 1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at page: 2, addresses: BC to C6. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for detail of the self-diagnosis code. Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the control switch block (FK-30350) is removed.
5-61E
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 6 REPAIR PARTS LIST 6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS NOTE: • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from the original one. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied.
•
Abbreviation AUS: Australian model JE: Tourist model CND: Canadian model CN: Chinese model HK: Hong Kong model
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
4 3 2 1
5
Cabinet (L) section (See page 6-5)
D C
1
6 Lens-EVF section (See page 6-4)
5
4 -2 VCard Bo
D
Cabinet (R) block assembly (See page 6-2 to 6-3)
1
A B A B
C
7 10
9
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
3-989-735-11 3-062-213-01 3-724-511-51 3-056-624-01 1-475-141-31
SCREW(M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 COVER, MIC SHOE, ACCESSORY LOCK ACE, +K SCREW (M2) REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-809)(PC4E)
5 5 6
1-475-950-21 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-811)(PC5) 1-475-950-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-812)(PC5E) 3-053-056-01 LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-811, 812) (PC5/PC5E)
Ref. No.
6-1
8
Part No.
Description
Remarks
6 7 8 8 8
3-742-854-21 3-052-290-11 3-062-110-02 3-062-110-11 3-062-110-21
LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-809)(PC4E) COVER, BATTERY TERMINAL COVER, JACK (PC5) COVER, JACK (PC5E:AEP,UK) COVER, JACK (PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
8 9 10
3-062-110-31 COVER, JACK (PC4E) 3-989-735-31 SCREW(M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 X-3950-754-1 CAP ASSY, LENS
6-1-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 62 51 Cabinet (R) block assembly-2 (See page 6-3)
61 A
B
LCD901
ND901 B
51
PD Bo -126 ard
63
52
60
57
54
59
51
55 56
51
58
57
A
53
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
51 52 52 52 * 53
3-989-735-11 X-3950-766-1 X-3950-769-1 X-3950-771-1 3-062-196-01
SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)(PC4E) CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)(PC5/PC5E) CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) SHEET, BL INSULATING
0 54 55 56 * 57 58
1-418-878-11 3-062-195-01 A-7074-456-A 3-051-232-01 3-060-704-01
TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER SPACER, PD PD-126 BOARD, COMPLETE CLIP, PCB SHEET (N), BL SHIELD
Ref. No. 59 60 61 62 62
Part No.
Description
Remarks
3-055-802-01 3-055-839-01 1-418-928-11 X-3950-748-1
SPACER, PANEL SHEET, PANEL PROTECTION PANEL, TOUCH (TP-30350) CABINET (T) ASSY, LCD (GRAY) (PC4E/PC5/PC5E) X-3950-757-1 CABINET (T) ASSY, LCD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
* 63 3-063-889-01 SHEET, (S) LCD901 8-753-050-52 ACX300CK-J 0 ND901 1-517-931-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE
6-2
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
114 104
Harness (Two cores) (PR-062) (8P) (2P) (8P)
131 130
not supplied
113
(2P)
104 119
129
120
121
115
122 128 118
107
123 104
109
124
104 108
(14P)
104
116
104
Harness (PD-109) (14P)
(8P)
112 111 110
(14P)
106
106 125 126 103 132
104
104 117
105
127
102 101
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
101 102 103 104 105
3-062-193-01 3-062-192-01 3-062-191-01 3-989-735-11 X-3950-744-1
SLIDER, EJECT KNOB KNOB, EJECT SCREW, TRIPOD SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 FRAME ASSY, BOTTOM
106 107 108 109 110
A-7074-459-A 3-062-211-01 1-694-689-11 3-713-791-01 3-062-207-01
BJ-1 BOARD, COMPLETE SHEET, FLEXIBLE PROTECTION TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 HOLDER, BATTERY
111 112 * 113 114 114
3-062-208-01 A-7074-457-A 3-055-323-01 X-3950-747-1 X-3950-756-1
SHEET, BATTERY HOLDER PO-5 BOARD, COMPLETE SPRING (MK), TORSION PLATE ASSY, BLIND (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E) PLATE ASSY, BLIND (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
115 116 116 117 118 119 120 120 121
Remarks
A-7074-458-A PR-34 BOARD, COMPLETE 3-062-105-01 COVER (FRONT), HINGE (GRAY) (PC4E/PC5/PC5E) 3-062-105-11 COVER (FRONT), HINGE (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) 3-989-735-31 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 3-062-202-01 PLATE, DV FIXED X-3950-746-1 HINGE ASSY, LCD 3-062-106-01 COVER (REAR), HINGE (GRAY) (PC4E/PC5/PC5E) 3-062-106-11 COVER (REAR), HINGE (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) 3-062-217-01 CABINET (R) (M) (GRAY) (PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
121 122 123 123 124
3-062-217-11 3-062-194-01 3-062-109-01 3-062-109-11 3-062-111-11
CABINET (R) (M) (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) SPACER, LOCK LID, CPC (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E) LID, CPC (BLUE) (PC5/PC5E) LABEL, POWER (GRAY) (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
124 124 124 125 125
3-062-111-21 LABEL, POWER (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK) 3-062-111-41 LABEL, POWER (BLUE) (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) 3-062-111-51 LABEL, POWER (BLUE)(PC5E:AEP,UK) 3-062-108-11 SHEET, GUARD (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E) 3-062-108-31 SHEET, GUARD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
126 127 127 127 127
3-062-188-01 3-062-112-11 3-062-112-21 3-062-112-31 3-062-112-51
COVER, ORNAMENT LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5) LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5E:AEP,UK) LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5)
127 127 127 * 128 * 129
3-062-112-61 3-062-112-71 3-062-112-81 3-062-786-01 3-062-788-01
LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5E:AEP,UK) LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC4E) SPACER, MF TAPE (2030)
130 131 * 132
1-960-422-11 HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P) 1-960-421-11 HARNESS (PD-109) (14P) 3-062-924-01 CUSHION, BT
6-3
Remarks
6-1-4. LENS-EVF SECTION 170 171 D
C
158
A
IC3201
170
174
B
172 166
159
168
151
159 167
170
159 169
173 not supplied
152
158
158
156
154
not supplied
157
153
155
M905
165
153
173
173
M904
157
A B
164
162
161
163 C
D
160
not supplied
158
LCD902
170 LED902
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
151 152 153 154 155
X-3950-751-1 X-3950-752-1 3-056-030-21 3-062-190-01 3-062-203-01
LENS ASSY, VF RING ASSY, VF REGULATION LOCK ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN SLEEVE, VF PLATE, VF ACRYLIC
156 157 158 159 * 160
X-3950-750-1 3-713-791-51 3-989-735-11 3-713-791-01 3-062-767-01
161 162 163 164 165
3-062-206-01 3-062-204-01 3-062-205-01 8-848-738-01 A-7031-114-A
* 166
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
167 168 169 170 171
1-758-155-21 3-053-973-01 3-062-212-01 A-7074-455-A 3-713-791-41
FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (OFB-04-14) RUBBER (W), SEAL SHEET, CF INSULATING CF-75 BOARD, COMPLETE SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2
GUIDE ASSY, VF SLEEVE SCREW (M1.7X3.5), TAPPING, P2 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 CUSHION, LCD
* 172 173 * 174 IC3201 IC3201
3-062-201-01 3-713-791-91 3-062-889-01 A-7031-011-A A-7031-012-A
FRAME, CD SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 SHEET, LF PROTECTION CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5) CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E)
CUSHION (L), BL BLUNIT CUSHION (B), BL DEVICE, LENS (LSV-651B) RING BLOCK ASSY, MF (SERVICE)
LCD902 LCD902 0 LED902 M904 M905
8-753-026-74 8-753-026-77 1-418-738-11 1-763-168-12 1-763-169-12
LCX032AK-J (PC4E) LCX033AK-J (PC5/PC5E) BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (0.44) ZOOM MOTOR FOCUS MOTOR
3-062-200-01 FRAME, LN
6-4
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-5. CABINET (L) SECTION EG
not supplied
205 SP901
212
MIC901
not supplied
231
213 202
G F
215 202
229 230 211 210
224
F
E
not supplied
226 214
not supplied
223 218
202 205
J4002 J4001
209
219
202 202
202
205
202 220
217
G
G D C C
B
208
A
205 (PC5/PC5E)
202
225
220 C not supplied
BT4001
5
4 -2 VCard o B
221
207
222
CN4001
227 216 203
206
202 202 B A
C
201 202
Mechanism deck (See page 6-6 to 6-8)
204 228
: BT4001 (Lithium battery) Control switch block on the mount position. (See page 4-63) Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
201 202 203 204 205
3-059-722-01 3-989-735-11 X-3950-753-1 A-7074-460-A 3-713-791-01
COVER, CASSETTE COMPARTMENT SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 WINDOW ASSY, NS NS-12 BOARD, COMPLETE SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2
206 207 208 209 210
3-062-198-01 X-3950-743-1 X-3950-742-1 3-062-189-02 3-062-132-01
RETAINER, MS CONNECTOR FRAME ASSY, MD BRACKET (FRONT) ASSY, BELT SCREW (M2.6), SPECIAL HEAD(STEP) COVER (HP&S), JACK
211 212 212 212 213
3-062-141-01 X-3950-764-1 X-3950-767-1 X-3950-770-1 X-3950-745-1
BELT, GRIP CABINET (L) ASSY(PC4E) CABINET (L) ASSY (GRAY)(PC5/PC5E) CABINET (L) ASSY (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) RETAINER ASSY, SPEAKER
214 215 215 215 215
3-062-199-01 X-3950-765-1 X-3950-768-1 X-3950-772-1 X-3950-773-1
RETAINER, HP JACK CABINET (G) ASSY (BLUE)(PC4E) CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5) CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5E:AEP,UK) CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
216
1-418-927-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350) (PC5/PC5E) 1-418-927-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)(PC4E) 3-975-921-01 SHEET, VIBRATION PROOF 3-062-209-01 SHEET, FIXED 1-418-925-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350) (PC5/PC5E)
Ref. No. 219 220 221 222 222
216 217 218 219
222
D
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1-418-925-21 3-062-214-01 3-062-210-01 A-7096-203-A
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)(PC4E) SCREW (M1.4X1.5) CUSHION, VC VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) A-7096-277-A VC-245 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (PC5E:AEP,UK)
223 * 224 * 225 * 226
A-7096-278-A VC-245 (L) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (PC4E) 1-469-833-11 BEAD, FERRITE 3-062-827-01 SHEET, BJ INSULATING 3-062-826-01 SHEET, DV INSULATING 3-063-395-01 PLATE, G FRAME GROUND
* 227 228 229 230 231
3-062-828-01 3-059-725-01 3-062-128-01 3-062-127-01 3-056-030-11
6-5
SHEET, TERMINAL BOARD LABEL, LS SPRING, COMPRESSION LOCK, BATTERY LOCK ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN
BT4001 1-756-075-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY) CN4001 1-794-262-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (11P) (PC5/PC5E) J4001 1-694-688-11 TERMINAL, S (S VIDEO) J4002 1-784-943-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(HEADPHONE) MIC901 1-418-926-11 MICROPHONE BLOCK SP901
1-529-674-11 SPEAKER (16MM)
6-1-6. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT AND DRUM BLOCK ASSEMBLY 703
702
704 M901
709
705
701 701
706
LS chassis block assembly (See page 6-7)
Mechanism chassis block assembly (See page 6-8)
710
707
708
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
701 702 703 704 705
3-703-816-14 X-3950-369-2 3-059-082-01 3-059-208-01 X-3950-370-3
SCREW (M1.4) CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY SPRING, TENSION SPRING (CASSETTE COMPARTMENT T) DAMPER ASSY
Remarks
706
3-059-101-03 RETAINER, LS GUIDE
701
Ref. No. 707 708 709 710 M901
6-6
Part No.
Description
7-624-102-04 A-7028-133-B 3-703-816-41 3-063-036-01 A-7048-940-A
STOP RING 1.5, TYPE -E MD (J100) SUB ASSY (K) SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD SPACER, WASHER (PS) DRUM (DEH-18A-R)
Remarks
6-1-7. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
762 761
752
763 764
765
766
760
758
752
759 not supplied
757
not supplied
768
not supplied
Q901
756 D901
H901
H902
S903 Q902
772
FP-102 (Note)
755
770 769 773
754
771
774
753 not supplied
752
775 751 Note: FP-102 is included in the LS sub assy and is attached to chassis by hot-press. Because installation of FP-102 requires a very high accuracy, FP-102 is not supplied as an independent service parts.
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
751 752 753 754 755
3-059-173-01 3-059-100-01 X-3950-364-1 X-3950-371-1 3-059-166-01
PLATE, LS CAM SCREW (M1.4X1.4), SPECIAL HEAD GEAR ASSY, GOOSENECK ARM ASSY, BRAKE (S) DRIVING BRAKE (S)
Remarks
Ref. No. 766 768 769 770 771
3-059-093-01 A-7094-819-A 3-059-165-01 X-3950-359-1 3-059-161-01
RETAINER, LED TG7 BLOCK ASSY SPRING (TG7 RETURN), TORSION ARM ASSY, PINCH SPRING (PINCH RETURN), TORSION
756 757 758 759 760
3-059-146-01 3-059-167-01 3-059-169-01 3-703-816-14 3-059-090-01
POSITIONING (S), CASSETTE SPRING (BRAKE S), TENSION COIL SPRING (BRAKE S ARM), TORSION SCREW (M1.4) SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD
772 773 774 775 D901
3-059-170-01 3-059-171-01 3-059-172-01 A-7094-816-A 8-719-078-71
BRAKE (T) GEAR (T), BRAKE SPRING (T), BRAKE LS BLOCK ASSY DIODE LA57A, SO (TAPE LED)
761 762 763 764 765
X-3950-358-3 3-059-156-01 X-3950-365-2 X-3950-366-1 X-3950-361-1
TG1 ASSY SPRING (TENSION REGULATOR) TABLE ASSY, S REEL TABLE ASSY, T REEL PLATE ASSY, RETAINER
H901 H902 Q901 Q902 S903
8-719-067-74 8-719-067-74 8-729-028-71 8-729-028-71 1-771-326-41
ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL) ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL) TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END) TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP) SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN)
6-7
Remarks
6-1-8. MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY 815
807
811 822 812 813
824
820
821
823
814
815 816 815
810
M903
not supplied
815
M902 (Including belt)
825 819 815
809 808
818 806 817
807
815 829
804
826 827 805 801
828
803 802 not supplied
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
801 802 803 804 805
3-059-211-01 3-059-220-01 3-059-187-01 3-059-186-03 3-060-002-01
GEAR, CONVERSION GEAR, RELAY SHAFT, WORM HOLDER, MOTOR ROLLER, LS GUIDE
806 807 808 809 810
3-059-189-01 3-703-816-41 3-059-225-01 3-059-191-01 3-059-190-01
811 812 813 814 815
1-677-049-11 1-677-084-11 3-059-149-01 3-059-148-01 3-703-816-14
816
3-059-117-01 COVER (A), GEAR
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
817 818 819 820 821
X-3950-367-1 3-059-139-01 3-059-188-01 A-7094-818-A A-7094-817-A
GEAR ASSY, MODE GEAR, GL DRIVING GEAR, DECELERATION COASTER (S) BLOCK ASSY COASTER (T) BLOCK ASSY
GEAR (A), CAM SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD SHIELD, MOTOR ROLLER, LS ARM, LS
822 823 824 825 826
3-059-126-01 3-962-914-01 A-7094-822-A 3-059-118-01 3-059-083-01
RAIL, GUIDE SCREW (M1.4X2) DRUM BASE BLOCK ASSY COVER (B), GEAR COVER (C), GEAR
FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD SLIDER, TG1 CAM ARM, TG1 DRIVING SCREW (M1.4)
827 828 829 M902
X-3950-368-1 3-059-192-01 3-063-355-01 8-835-685-01
M903
6-8
Remarks
ARM ASSY, PINCH DRIVING GEAR (B), CAM ROLLER (S1), LS GUIDE MOTOR, DC SCD18A/C-NP (INCLUDING BELT) CAPSTAN A-7094-823-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, LOADING
BJ-1
CF-75
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE: • Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • CAPACITORS: uF: µF
•
• •
•
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: metal-film resistor METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor F: nonflammable COILS uH: µH SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , uPD..., µPD... Abbreviation AUS: Australian model JE: Tourist model Remarks Ref. No. Part No.
A-7074-459-A BJ-1 BOARD, COMPLETE ******************** VDR311 VDR312 VDR313 VDR315 VDR316
< CAPACITOR > 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
CND: CN: HK: KR: Description
Canadian model Chinese model Hong Kong model Korea model Remarks
< VARISTOR > (Ref.No.;30000 Series)
C3101 C3103
When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.
0.001uF 0.001uF
10% 10%
16V 16V
1-803-742-21 1-803-742-21 1-803-742-21 1-803-742-21 1-803-742-21
VARISTOR, CHIP VARISTOR, CHIP VARISTOR, CHIP VARISTOR, CHIP VARISTOR, CHIP
VDR319 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP ************************************************************
< CONNECTOR >
A-7074-455-A CF-75 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* (Ref.No.;20000 Series) (IC3201 is not included in this complete board.)
CN3102 1-794-276-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE 4P CN3103 1-794-403-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P CN3104 1-794-375-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P < DIODE >
< CAPACITOR > D3101 D3102 D3103
8-719-072-91 DIODE MAZJ200D0LS0 8-719-056-61 DIODE 015AZ8.2-TPL3 8-719-056-61 DIODE 015AZ8.2-TPL3 < FERRITE BEAD >
FB3101 FB3102 FB3103 FB3104 FB3105
1-500-444-11 1-500-444-11 1-500-444-11 1-500-444-11 1-500-444-11
FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE
0UH 0UH 0UH 0UH 0UH
FB3106 1-500-444-11 FERRITE
0UH
< JACK > J3101 J3102 J3103
1-691-737-11 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(EXT MIC) 1-793-995-11 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (l LANC) 1-778-040-11 JACK, SMALL TYPE (AV JACK) < IC LINK >
0 PS3101 0 PS3102 0 PS3103 0 PS3104
1-576-415-21 1-576-415-21 1-576-415-21 1-576-415-21
FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) < RESISTOR >
R3101 R3102 R3103 R3105 R3110
1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP
0 0 0 0 0
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
R3111 R3112
1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP
0 0
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
C2201 C2202 C2203 C3201 C3202
1-117-919-11 1-125-777-11 1-119-923-81 1-104-851-11 1-164-850-11
TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
10uF 0.1uF 0.047uF 10uF 10PF
20% 10% 10% 20% 0.50PF
6.3V 10V 10V 10V 16V
C3203 C3204 C3207 C3208 C3452
1-107-820-11 1-119-751-11 1-164-939-11 1-164-004-11 1-127-895-91
CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP
0.1uF 22uF 0.0022uF 0.1uF 22uF
20% 10% 10% 20%
16V 16V 16V 25V 4V
C3453 C3454 C3455 C3456 C3457
1-127-895-91 1-125-777-11 1-125-777-11 1-119-923-81 1-119-923-81
TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
22uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.047uF 0.047uF
20% 10% 10% 10% 10%
4V 10V 10V 10V 10V
C3458 C3459 C3460 C3461 C3462
1-119-923-81 1-119-923-81 1-125-817-11 1-125-817-11 1-125-817-11
CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
0.047uF 0.047uF 10uF 10uF 10uF
10% 10% 10% 10% 10%
10V 10V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V
C3463 C3464 C3465 C3466
1-125-817-11 1-110-501-11 1-127-895-91 1-125-777-11
CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
10uF 0.33uF 22uF 0.1uF
10% 10% 20% 10%
6.3V 16V 4V 10V
< CONNECTOR > CN2201 CN2202 CN3351 CN3353 CN3354
6-9
1-750-346-21 1-750-340-21 1-784-421-11 1-794-411-21 1-794-404-21
CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 6P CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 16P CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 27P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 8P CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 88P
CF-75 Ref. No.
FP-102
Part No.
NS-12
PD-126
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
IC3201 IC3201 IC3451
A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5) A-7031-012-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E) 8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2
FP-102 FLEXIBLE (Not supplied) ************************** (Ref.No.;4000 Series)
1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR 100uH 1-414-771-91 INDUCTOR CHIP 10uH
< DIODE > D901
< TRANSISTOR > Q2202 Q2203 Q2204 Q2205 Q2206
8-729-041-23 8-729-037-52 8-729-037-52 8-729-037-52 8-729-037-52
TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR
Q2207 Q3201 Q3202
8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR
Remarks
TH2201 1-810-812-21 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608) ************************************************************
< COIL > L3201 L3451
Description < THERMISTOR >
< IC >
8-719-078-71 DIODE LN57A.SO < HOLE ELEMENT >
NDS356AP 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3) 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3) 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3) 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
H901 H902
8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T < TRANSISTOR >
UN9213J-(K8).SO 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 UN9213J-(K8).SO
Q901 Q902
8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END) 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP) < SWITCH >
< RESISTOR >
S903 1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN) ************************************************************
R2201 R2203 R2204 R2205 R2206
1-218-985-11 1-218-964-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-964-11 1-218-971-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
470K 8.2K 0 8.2K 33K
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
R2207 R2208 R2209 R2211 R2212
1-218-964-11 1-218-955-11 1-218-962-11 1-218-957-11 1-218-937-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
8.2K 1.5K 5.6K 2.2K 47
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
R2213 R2214 R2215 R2216 R2217
1-218-937-11 1-218-971-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-977-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
47 33K 100K 100K 100K
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
R2218 R3201 R3202 R3351 R3451
1-218-977-11 1-218-959-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-959-11 1-218-969-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
100K 3.3K 0 3.3K 22K
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
R3452 R3453 R3454 R3455 R3456
1-218-969-11 1-218-969-11 1-218-969-11 1-218-965-11 1-218-965-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
22K 22K 22K 10K 10K
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
C2101 C2102 C2103 C2104 C2105
1-119-750-11 1-125-777-11 1-164-943-11 1-117-919-11 1-125-777-11
TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
22uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 10uF 0.1uF
20% 10% 10% 20% 10%
6.3V 10V 16V 6.3V 10V
R3457 R3458 R3459
1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP
1M 15K 1M
5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
C2107 C2108 C2109 C2110 C2111
1-107-826-91 1-164-943-11 1-164-943-11 1-164-943-11 1-164-739-11
CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 560PF
10% 10% 10% 10% 5%
16V 16V 16V 16V 50V
C2112 C2113 C2114 C2115 C2116
1-125-838-91 1-164-004-11 1-164-943-11 1-107-687-11 1-164-937-11
CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
2.2uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 3.3uF 0.001uF
10% 10% 10% 20% 10%
6.3V 25V 16V 20V 16V
A-7074-460-A NS-12 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* (Ref No.;20000 Series) < DIODE > D003 D005 D006
< IC > IC001 8-749-013-13 IC RS-70-TU ************************************************************ A-7074-456-A PD-126 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No.;40000 Series) < CAPACITOR >
< SWITCH > S2201
8-719-061-82 DIODE TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY) 8-719-078-78 DIODE DCZ2805 8-719-078-78 DIODE DCZ2805
1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(EVF ON/OFF) < SENSOR >
SE3450 1-418-682-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW) SE3451 1-418-682-21 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.
6-10
PD-126 Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
C2117 C2118 C2119 C2120 C2123
1-164-874-11 1-125-838-91 1-125-838-91 1-125-838-91 1-107-687-11
CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP
100PF 2.2uF 2.2uF 2.2uF 3.3uF
5% 10% 10% 10% 20%
Remarks 16V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 20V
C2124 C2125 C2126 C2127 C2128
1-164-943-11 1-163-021-91 1-115-566-11 1-125-777-11 1-107-725-11
CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF 0.01uF 4.7uF 0.1uF 0.1uF
10% 10% 10% 10% 10%
16V 50V 10V 10V 16V
C2129 C2130 C2133 C2181 C2182
1-216-295-91 1-164-943-11 1-109-982-11 1-128-964-91 1-125-777-11
SHORT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
0 (Note) 0.01uF 1uF 100uF 0.1uF
10% 10% 20% 10%
16V 10V 6.3V 10V
C2183 C2184 C2185 C2186
1-128-964-91 1-125-777-11 1-104-851-11 1-125-777-11
TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
100uF 0.1uF 10uF 0.1uF
20% 10% 20% 10%
6.3V 10V 10V 10V
Ref. No.
1-794-378-21 1-794-377-21 1-778-155-11 1-778-172-11 1-764-704-21
Description
Remarks
< RESISTOR >
< CONNECTOR > CN2100 CN2101 * CN2103 * CN2104 CN2105
Part No.
PO-5
PIN, CONNECTOR 14P PIN, CONNECTOR 8P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 7P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 5P
R2111 R2112 R2113 R2114 R2115
1-218-985-11 1-218-985-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-967-11 1-218-958-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
470K 470K 0 15K 2.7K
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
R2116 R2117 R2118 R2119 R2122
1-218-973-11 1-218-975-11 1-218-969-11 1-218-975-11 1-218-989-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
47K 68K 22K 68K 1M
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
R2123 R2124 R2129 R2134 R2136
1-218-990-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-929-11 1-218-929-11
SHORT RES-CHIP SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
0 100K 0 10 10
5%
1/16W
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
R2137 R2138 R2143 R2144 R2146
1-218-929-11 1-218-941-11 1-218-965-11 1-218-985-11 1-218-990-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT
10 100 10K 470K 0
5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
R2147 R2148 R2153 R2157 R2158
1-218-990-11 1-218-965-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-989-11 1-218-975-11
SHORT RES-CHIP SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
0 10K 0 1M 68K
5%
1/16W
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
R2159 R2160 R2162 R2163 R2165
1-218-979-11 1-218-988-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-990-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT SHORT SHORT
150K 820K 0 0 0
5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W
R2166 R2168 R2169 R2170 R2172
1-218-965-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-990-11
RES-CHIP SHORT SHORT RES-CHIP SHORT
10K 0 0 100K 0
5%
1/16W
5%
1/16W
R2173 R2174 R2175 R2176 R2177
1-218-990-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-977-11
SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT RES-CHIP
0 0 0 0 100K
5%
1/16W
R2178 R2179 R2180 R2181 R2182
1-218-977-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-961-11 1-218-953-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
100K 100K 100K 4.7K 1K
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
< DIODE > D2101 D2102 D2104 D2104 D2181
8-719-073-01 8-713-102-80 8-719-040-12 8-719-050-42 8-719-059-47
DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE
MA111-TX 1T369-01-T8A 015Z3.3-TPH3 RD3.3UM-T1B PG1111R-TR
< IC > IC2101 IC2103
8-759-660-93 IC RB5P004AM1 8-752-403-84 IC CXD3505R-T4 < COIL >
L2101 L2102 L2103 L2104 L2181
1-414-755-11 1-414-754-11 1-414-754-11 1-410-998-31 1-412-056-11
INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR
22uH 10uH 10uH 2.7uH 4.7uH
L2182
1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR
100uH
< TRANSISTOR > Q2101 Q2102 Q2103 Q2104 Q2109
8-729-427-74 8-729-037-74 8-729-427-74 8-729-041-23 8-729-037-53
TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR
XP4601-TXE UN9213J-(TX).SO XP4601-TXE NDS356AP 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
Q2111 Q2112 Q2181 Q2182 Q2183
8-729-037-52 8-729-048-77 8-729-042-72 8-729-037-53 8-729-042-59
TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO XP4313-(TX).SO UN9214J-(K8).SO 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3) UN9112J-(K8).SO
R2183 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R2184 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 ************************************************************ A-7074-457-A PO-5 BOARD, COMPLETE ******************** (Ref.No.;30000 Series) < SWITCH > S3501 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(PANEL OPEN) ************************************************************
Note : Short is mounted to the location where C2129 is printed.
6-11
PR-34 Ref. No.
VC-245
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
A-7096-203-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) ********************** A-7096-277-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (PC5E:AEP,UK) ********************** A-7096-278-A VC-245 (L) BOARD, COMPLETE (PC4E) ************************* (Ref.No.;10000 Series)
A-7074-458-A PR-34 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No;30000 Series) < SWITCH > S3601 1-771-338-21 SWITCH, PUSH (PANEL REVERSE) ************************************************************
************************************************************
Electrical parts list of the VC-245 board are not shown. pages 6-13 to 6-25 are not shown.
6-12
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
MISCELLANEOUS ************* 0 54 61 108 130 131 164 167 216 216 219
219 223 811 812 BT4001
1-418-878-11 1-418-928-11 1-694-689-11 1-960-422-11 1-960-421-11
TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER PANEL, TOUCH (TP-30350) TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P) HARNESS (PD-109) (14P)
0 0
8-848-738-01 DEVICE, LENS (LSV-651B) 1-758-155-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (OFB-04-14) 1-418-927-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350) (PC5/PC5E) 1-418-927-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)(PC4E) 1-418-925-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350) (PC5/PC5E) 1-418-925-21 1-469-833-11 1-677-049-11 1-677-084-11 1-756-075-11
* 0 0
0 0 0
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)(PC4E) BEAD, FERRITE FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
0
CN4001 1-794-262-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (11P) (PC5/PC5E) D901 8-719-078-71 DIODE LA57A, SO (TAPE LED) H901 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL) H902 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL) IC3201 A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5) IC3201 J4001 J4002 LCD901 LCD902
A-7031-012-A 1-694-688-11 1-784-943-41 8-753-050-52 8-753-026-74
LCD902 0 LED902 M901 M902
8-753-026-77 1-418-738-11 A-7048-940-A 8-835-685-01
M903 M904 M905 MIC901 0 ND901 Q901
CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E) TERMINAL, S (S VIDEO) JACK (SMALL TYPE)(HEADPHONE) ACX300CK-J LCX032AK-J (PC4E)
LCX033AK-J (PC5/PC5E) BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (0.44) DRUM (DEH-18A-R) MOTOR, DC SCD18A/C-NP (INCLUDING BELT) CAPSTAN A-7094-823-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, LOADING
1-763-168-12 1-763-169-12 1-418-926-11 1-517-931-11 8-729-028-71
ZOOM MOTOR FOCUS MOTOR MICROPHONE BLOCK TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END)
Q902 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP) S903 1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN) SP901 1-529-674-11 SPEAKER (16MM) ************************************************************ ACCESSORIES ************
0 0 0 0
0
1-475-141-31 COMMANDER, REMOTE (RMT-809)(PC4E) 1-475-851-22 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5:US,CND) 1-475-851-33 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10) (PC4E/PC5:E,HK,JE/PC5E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,JE) 1-475-851-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5:KR) 1-475-851-81 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5E:CN)
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.
6-26
0
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1-475-950-21 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-811) (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) 1-475-950-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-812) (PC5E:AEP,UK) 1-543-798-11 FILTER, CLAMP (FERRITE CORE) (PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK) 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (PC5:JE/PC5E:JE) 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (PC5:E,HK/PC5E:E,HK) 1-573-291-11 CONNECTOR, CONVERSION (21P) (PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK) 1-575-131-11 CORD, POWER (PC5:E/PC5E:E) 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (PC5E:AUS) 1-765-080-11 CORD, CONNECTION (A/V)(1.5M) 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP) 1-776-985-11 1-782-476-11 1-783-374-11 1-783-739-22 1-790-073-11
CORD, POWER (PC5:KR) CORD, POWER (PC5E:CN) CORD, POWER (PC4E:UK/PC5:HK/PC5E:UK,HK) CORD CONNECTION (DK-115)(PC5/PC5E) CORD, POWER 2P (PC5:JE/PC5E:JE)
1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (PC5:US,CND) 1-792-451-11 CORD WITH CONNECTOR (PC SERIAL CABLE) (PC5/PC5E) 3-053-056-01 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-811,812) (PC5/PC5E) 3-060-457-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ENGLISH)(PC5:US,CND,E,HK,JE) 3-060-457-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(FRENCH)(PC5:CND) 3-060-457-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(TRADITIONAL CHINESE) (PC5:E,HK/PC5E:HK) 3-060-457-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(KOREAN)(PC5:KR,JE) 3-060-458-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ENGLISH,RUSSIAN)(PC5E) 3-060-458-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(FRENCH,GERMAN) (PC5E:AEP,E,JE) 3-060-458-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ITALIAN,DUTCH)(PC5E:AEP) 3-060-458-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(SPANISH,PORTUGUESE) (PC5:E.JE/PC5E:E) 3-060-458-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ARABIC,PERSIAN) (PC5:E/PC5E:E) 3-060-458-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (PC5E:E,CN,JE) 3-060-476-01 DISK, SYSTEM (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE) (PC5/PC5E) 3-062-114-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (PC5:US,CND,E,HK,JE) 3-062-114-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(PC5:CND) 3-062-114-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)(PC5:E,JE) 3-062-114-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE)(PC5:E,HK) 3-062-114-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(PC5:KR,JE) 3-062-114-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(PC5:E) Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
3-062-115-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH,RUSSIAN) (PC5E:AEP,UK) 3-062-115-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH,GERMAN) (PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP) 3-062-115-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP) 3-062-115-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN,DUTCH) (PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP) 3-062-116-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH, RUSSIAN) (PC5E:E,AUS,HK,CN,JE) 3-062-116-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN) (PC5E:E,JE) 3-062-116-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ABABIC, PERSIAN) (PC5E:E) 3-062-116-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(PC5E:E,CN,JE) 3-062-116-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRANDITIONAL CHINESE)(PC5E:HK) 3-742-854-21 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-809)(PC4E) 3-967-386-11 CLEANING CLOTH A-7033-740-A MEMORY STICK (MSA-4A)(PC5/PC5E)
6-27E
〈OPTICAL
AXIS FRAME〉
— 198 —
✂
Take a copy of OPTICAL AXIS FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
〈FOR
CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉
For NTSC model
DCR-PC5 Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
✂ For PAL model
✂
DCR-PC4E/PC5E
— 199 —